Spreadsheet: 0379882a-15d9-4a5b-bc53-6687e58a3e1f
Sheet: Sheet1

qty. | isbn | Cluster | authoreditor1_lastname | originators | title | subtitle | series_title | volume_number | edition_number | copyright_year | number_of_arabic_pages | term_cover_type | term_medium | bibliographic_information | springer_reference | price_eur_status | price_eur_net | price_eur_gross_d | price_eur_gross_a | price_gbp | price_chf | term_language1 | term_main_discipline | subject1 | [NAME] | bic_code1 | subject2 | term_subject2 | bic_code2 | term_bookstore | term_product_category | term_publisher_name | delivery_status_scsc | pub_date_planned | [NAME] | distribution_information | table_of_contents_short | info_text | usp_editorial | term_publication_class | discount_group_scsc | ebook_info_no_e_rights | ebook_package | term_ebook_package
 | 978-3-642-38156-0 | Arts | Xiang | [NAME]; [NAME] | China Cultural and Creative Industry Reports 2013 |  | Understanding China |  | 1 | 2013 | 150 | Hard cover | Book | X, 150 p. 52 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Humanities / Arts | SCV20000 | Humanities, general | H | SCX22040 | Cultural Studies | JFC | Humanities | Contributed volume | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Report One Film Industry.- Report Two News and Publishing Industry.- Report Three Broadcasting and TV Industry.- Report Four Animation and Games Industry.- Report Five Online New Media Industry.- Report Six Advertising Industry.- Report Seven Fine Art Industry.- Report 8 Development of the Performing Arts.- Index. | This collection provides access to up to date, very high quality research and critical perspectives on China’s CCIs on an industry by industry basis.  Industries dealt with by this collection include: advertising, architecture, art and antiques, computer games, crafts, design, designer fashion, film and video, music, performing arts, publishing, software, TV and radio, digital media.  The collection combines recently translated work by acknowledged experts on individual sectors of the creative industries from within China with more critical work by internationally-based experts on China’s CCIs and their implications beyond China. The collection draws on the expertise of research academics and of industry based practitioners. China’s Creative and Cultural Industries Reports  is a [NAME] on China providing fresh, new material and perspectives on a key area of cultural and economic development in one of the world’s fastest growing economies. Publication in the form of a collection, which could be sold in multiple of traditional and digital formats, either as a volume or as individual reports, makes it possible for readers to select the format most relevant to their interests.  ​ | <p> The first book to offer insights into China’s CCIs by authoritative Chinese authors translated into English  <br>The first comprehensive report on the Chinese perspective of their CCIs translated into English <br>Offers a juxtaposition to the perspective of global experts on the Chinese CCIs<br>An essential guide for SMEs that need practical insights into the Chinese CCI market Impact on the CCI research mediums and industry of new authoritative  information from established and  new contributors ​ </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-7965-9 | Education | Arnon | Ilana Arnon; [NAME]; [NAME]; Asuman Oktaç; [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | APOS Theory | A Framework for Research and Curriculum Development in Mathematics Education |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 250 | Hard cover | Book | XX, 250 p. 33 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO25000 | Mathematics Education | JNU | SCO22000 | Learning & Instruction | JNT | Education | Monograph | Springer New York | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1 Introduction.- Chapter 2 From Piaget’s Theory to APOS Theory: Reflective Abstraction in Learning Mathematics and the Historical Development of APOS Theory.- Chapter 3 Mental Structures and Mechanisms: APOS Theory and the Construction of Mathematical Knowledge.- Chapter 4  Genetic Decomposition.- Chapter 5 The Teaching of Mathematics Using APOS Theory.- Chapter 6 The APOS Paradigm for Research and Curriculum Development.- Chapter 7 Schemas, Their Development and Interaction.- Chapter 8 Totality as a Possible New Stage and Levels in APOS Theory.- Chapter 9 Use of APOS Theory to Teach Mathematics at Elementary School.- Chapter 10 Frequently Asked Questions.- Chapter 11 Conclusions.- Chapter 12  Annotated Bibliography.- References.- Index. | In spite of the fact that APOS Theory has been used extensively in numerous scholarly publications, in the design of textbooks, and in teaching practice, there is no single references that contains all the relevant information about its components, and provides guidance about its application. The goal of this book is to present the main elements of APOS theory. It should be useful for researchers who work with, or would like to learn more about, this theoretical approach, people who are interested in the way which mathematical conceptions are constructed according to this theory, Mathematics Education researchers, graduate students in Mathematics Education, and Mathematics instructors. | <p>The first book on APOS Theory in Mathematics Education, written by the people who developed APOS Theory</p><p>Provides examples of curriculum development utilizing APOS Theory</p><p>Links research and teaching APOS Theory in a coherent manner</p><p>Describes relation of APOS Theory to Functions, Mathematical Induction, Discrete Mathematics, Linear and Abstract Algebra​ and more</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4419-5545-6 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME] | International Handbook of Metacognition and Learning Technologies |  | Springer International Handbooks of Education | 26 | 1 | 2013 | 721 | Hard cover | Book | LII, 721 p. 115 illus., 81 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 499 | 533.93 | 548.9 | 449.5 | 664.5 | English | Education | SCO22000 | Learning & Instruction | JNT | SCI21017 | Artificial Intelligence (incl. Robotics) | UYQ | Education | Handbook | Springer New York | Available | 2013-05-31 00:00:00 | 2013-05-04 00:00:00 |  | <OL> Planning, sub-goaling, and metareasoning  Metacognitive monitoring and control   Strategy instruction to support metacognition and learning   Control of behavior (e.g., help-seeking behavior)   Development of metacognition (knowledge and strategy)   Interface between affective and/or motivation processes with metacognition   Scaffolding of metacognition   External regulating agents (human and artificial) and metacognition   Methodological issues in using computer environments as data collection tools to study metacognition.  </OL> |  | <p>Exhaustive offering of global research in the field, including cognitive and learning sciences to AI to educational technology</p><p><p>Only publication integrating all aspects of the fields of metacognition and learning technologies</p><p><p>Provides comprehensive overview of learning technologies used to study and foster students’ metacognitive learning </p><p><p>Describes features of the learning technologies and how they have been designed to study and support metacognitive processing and SRL</p><p><p>Provides far-reaching conceptual frameworks for metacognition and the underlying theoretical assumptions</p><p><p>Summarizes empirical findings of effective learning technologies in detecting, tracing, modeling and fostering learners’ metacognitive behavior</p><p><p>Discusses implications for design of metacognitive tools and examines theoretical, methodological, analytical and instructional challenges</p> | Science | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7042-3 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME]; Sophie Vanhoonacker | Teaching and Learning the European Union | Traditional and Innovative Methods | Innovation and Change in Professional Education | 9 | 1 | 2014 | 233 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 233 p. 14 illus., 12 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | [NAME] | Professional & Vocational Education | JNRV | SCO36000 | Higher Education | JNM | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction - Teaching European Studies: Educational Challenges.- PART I – EUROPEAN STUDIES: [NAME] AND [NAME]. Shaping the New Professional for the New Professions; [NAME], [NAME] and A.C. Niculescu.- 3. Working at the EU Institutions: New Human Resources Selection Strategy; N.D. Bearfield.- 4. Educating for EU Citizenship and [NAME] through Active Learning; [NAME] 5. Multilingual Universities: Policies and [NAME]; [NAME] and D. Veronesi.- 6. Thinking Europe: A Canadian Academic Immersion inside the European Institutions - EU Study Tour and Internship Program; [NAME] and A. Berlin.- PART II – MAPPING INNOVATIONS IN TEACHING AND LEARNING.- 7. Mapping Innovative Teaching Methods and Tools in European Studies: Results from a Comprehensive Study; [NAME], [NAME] and G. Stevancevic.- 8. Innovativeness in Teaching European Studies: an Empirical Investigation; [NAME] and G. Stevancevic.- 9. [NAME] in European Studies; S. Baroncelli.- PART III – INNOVATIVE TEACHING AND EARNING IN EUROPEAN STUDIES.- 10. Assessing EU Simulations: Evidence from the Transatlantic EuroSim; [NAME] and P. Bursens.- 11. Distance Learning as an Alternative Method of Teaching European Studies; [NAME]. Problem Based Learning in European Studies; H. Maurer and [NAME]. Finding the Right Mix? Teaching European Studies through [NAME]; A. Mihai.- 14. The [NAME] is the Message: Social Networks as Teaching Tools; [NAME], [NAME], T. Mayrgündter and J. Niederhauser.- Biographies.- Index. | This volume examines the EU’s changing educational context and its challenges. Based on an extensive survey of more than 2000 European Studies courses in 30 European countries, it maps and analyses the features of teaching methodologies as they emerge from both disciplinary as well as interdisciplinary curricula. It presents a series of case studies on some of the most-used innovative teaching tools emerging in the field such as simulation games, e-learning, problem based learning, blended learning, and learning through the use of social networks. Based on the contributors’ own experiences and academic research, the book examines both strengths and possible pitfalls of these increasingly popular methods. The book’s critical approach will inspire educators and scholars committed to improving the teaching methods and tools in the area of European Studies and other programmes of higher education facing similar challenges. | <p>An original contribution to the expanding field of teaching and learning methods</p><p><p>The first systematic attempt to map and analyse the broad range of teaching methodologies in the growing field of European Studies</p><p><p>Highly relevant for any educator or scholar taking the ‘learning to learn’ paradigm seriously</p><p> </p><p> </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7124-6 | Education | Blossing | Ulf Blossing; [NAME]; Lejf Moos | The Nordic Education Model | 'A School for All' Encounters Neo-Liberal Policy | Policy Implications of Research in Education | 1 | 1 | 2014 | 248 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 248 p. 10 illus., 7 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO19000 | Educational Policy and Politics | JNF | SCO29000 | Sociology of Education | JN | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- 1. [NAME] in a Time of Change.- PART 1: Country Cases.- 2. A School for Every Child in Sweden.- 3. The Norwegian School for All – Historical Emergence and Neoliberal Confrontation.- 4. A School for Less than All in Denmark.- 5. A School for All in Finland.- 6. The Development of a School for All in Iceland: Equality, Threats and Political Conditions.- PART 2: Thematic Chapters.- 7. A Social Democratic Response to Market-led Education Policies: Concession or Rejection?.- 8. Progressive Education and New Governance in Denmark, Norway and Sweden.- 9. [NAME] in the Nordic Countries - Framing, Diversity and Matters of Inclusion and Exclusion in a School for All.- 10. One School – Different Worlds: Segregation on the Basis of Freedom of Choice.- 11. Nordic Upper Secondary School:  Regular and Irregular Programmes – or Just One Irregular School for All?.- 12. Dropout in a School for All: Individual or Systemic Solutions?- 13. Schools for All: A Nordic Model. | This book presents a detailed analysis of the educational model in Nordic European countries. It describes the traditional idea of education for all, which can be characterized by the right for every child to have an education of equal quality in a common school for all pupils regardless of social class, abilities, gender, or ethnicity.  Against this background, The Nordic Education Model traces the rise of neo-liberal policies that have been enacted by those who believe the School for All ideology does not produce the knowledge and skills that students need to succeed in an increasingly competitive and global marketplace. It examines the conflict between these two ideas and shows how neo-liberal technologies affect the Nordic model in different ways.The authors also show how social technologies are being interpreted in different ways in actual school practices. This process of translating national regulations into internal sense builds on the values in the culture to which they are introduced. In the end, this book reveals that a Nordic model can constitute a delicate balance between traditional values, institutionalized practices, and contemporary, neo-liberal forms of governance and policies. It may be argued from a new institutional perspective that the main structures of the Nordic educational model will sustain as long as the deeply rooted Nordic culture survives in the globalised society. | <p>Examines the conflict between the traditional School for all model and more recent neo-liberal policies </p><p>Shows that neo-liberal technologies affect the Nordic model in different ways</p><p>Describes, analyzes and discusses a Nordic vision in relation to international trends</p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6436-1 | Education | Blömeke | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | International Perspectives on Teacher Knowledge, Beliefs and Opportunities to Learn | TEDS-M Results | Advances in Mathematics Education |  | 1 | 2014 | 390 | Hard cover | Book | X, 390 p. 90 illus. | 0 | final | 129.95 | 139.05 | 142.94 | 117 | 173 | English | Education | SCO31000 | Teaching and Teacher Education | JNMT | SCO25000 | Mathematics Education | JNU | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction: State of research, framework and design of TEDS-M: [NAME], F.-J. [NAME], G. Kaiser & W. H. Schmidt.- 2. Teacher knowledge at the end of teacher education: International perspectives.- 2.1 Teacher education effectiveness: Quality and equity of future primary teachers’ mathe-matics content and mathematics pedagogical content knowledge: [NAME], U. Suhl & G. Kaiser.- 2.2 Teacher education effectiveness: Quality and equity of future lower secondary teachers’ mathematics content and mathematics pedagogical content knowledge: [NAME] et al.- 2.3 Teacher education effectiveness: Quality and equity of future primary and future lower secondary teachers’ general pedagogical knowledge: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Hsieh.- 2.4 In-depth analyses of different countries' responses to MCK and MPCK items: Why did Taiwan excel? A view on the difference within and between East and West: F.-J. [NAME] et al.- 3. Teacher beliefs at the end of teacher education: International perspectives.- 3.1 The cultural notion of teacher education: Future primary teachers' beliefs on the nature of mathematics: [NAME], G. Kaiser & Ch. Schmotz.- 3.2 The cultural notion of teacher education: Future lower secondary teachers' beliefs on the nature of mathematics, the learning of mathematics and mathematics achievement: S.-J. Tang & F.-J. Hsieh.- 3.3 The cultural notion of teacher education: Comparison of lower secondary future teachers’ and teacher educators’ beliefs: T.-Y. Wang, F.-J. [NAME], T.-T. Yiu.- 4. Relationship of teacher knowledge and beliefs: International perspectives.- 4.1 On the relationship of future primary and lower secondary teachers’ knowledge and beliefs: [NAME] et al.- 4.2 Profiles of lower secondary teachers’ knowledge and beliefs: A latent class analysis: S. Blömeke & U. Suhl.- 4.3 On the relationship of tested knowledge and self-reported perception of preparedness for teaching: A fuzzy field: S. Blömeke.- 5. Opportunities to learn in teacher education: International perspectives.- 5.1 Homogeneity or heterogeneity? Profiles of opportunities to learn in primary teacher education: S. Blömeke & G. Kaiser.- 5.2 Homogeneity or heterogeneity? Profiles of opportunities to learn in lower secondary teacher education: [NAME] et al.- 6 Effects of OTL on teacher knowledge and beliefs: International perspectives.- 6.1  What matters in primary teacher education? A comparison of background, selectivity and OTL effects on future teachers’ mathematics content and pedagogical content knowledge: [NAME], U. Suhl, G. Kaiser & Döhrmann.- 6.2 What matters in lower secondary teacher education? A comparison of background, se-lectivity and OTL effects on future teachers’ content knowledge: [NAME] et al.- 6.3 Does school experience matter for future teachers' general pedagogical knowledge? J. König & S. Blömeke.- 7. Country studies.- 7.1 MCK and MPCK of primary and lower secondary teachers at the end of teacher education in Taiwan: Hot topics and pressing issues.- 7.2 MCK and MPCK of primary and lower secondary teachers at the end of teacher education in the USA: Hot topics and pressing issues: [NAME] et al.- 7.3 MCK and MPCK of primary and lower secondary teachers at the end of teacher educa-tion in Germany: Hot topics and pressing issues: [NAME] et al.- 7.4 MCK and MPCK of primary and lower secondary teachers at the end of teacher educa-tion in Singapore: Hot topics and pressing issues: [NAME] et al.- 8. Methodological reflections on the TEDS-M instruments and the nature of teacher knowledge.- 8.1 The conceptualization of MCK and MPCK in TEDS-M: [NAME], M., Kaiser, G. & Blömeke, S.- 8.2 Diagnosing teacher knowledge by applying multidimensional item response theory and multi-group models: [NAME], R. Houang & U. Suhl.- 8.3 The conc | This book offers results from the comparative “Teacher Education and Development Study – Learning to Teach Mathematics (TEDS-M)'. Carried out under the auspices of the International Association for the Evaluation of Educational Achievement (IEA), more than 23,000 mathematics teachers at the primary and lower secondary levels from 16 countries were tested at the end of the teacher education on their mathematics and mathematics pedagogical content knowledge as well as surveyed on their beliefs and their opportunities to learn. In addition, representative samples of teacher educators and training institutions were surveyed. TEDS-M analyses in particular the relationship between teacher education policies, practices and outcomes.  ​ | <p>Comprehensive overview on the TEDS-M 2008 results</p><p>Offers unique insights into the teacher educational systems in 16 ​countries worldwide </p><p>Presents analytical and relational, as well as descriptive, results of TEDS-M data</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6856-7 | Education | Boone | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Rasch Analysis in the Human Sciences |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 200 p. 50 illus. | 0 | approx. | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO27000 | Science Education | JNU | SCS16003 | Statistics for Social Science, Behavorial Science, Education, Public Policy, and [NAME] | JHBC | Education | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2013-09-20 00:00:00 |  |  | What is Rasch Measurement & How Can Rasch Measurement Help Me?.- Rating Scale Surveys, A Rasch Rating Scale Analysis (Step I)-Reading Data and Running an Analysis.- Understanding Person Measures.- Item Measures.- Wright Maps - First Steps.- Wright Maps - Second Steps Fit.- How Well Does That Rating Scale Work? How Do You Know, Too?.- [NAME], Item Reliability and More.- What is an Ogive? How do I Use It?.- Some Wright Map Nuance, How To Set the Probability of Success at 65% (or whichever percentage you wish to choose).- Differential Item Functioning.- Linking Surveys and Tests.- Setting Pass/Fail Points and Competency Levels.- Expressing Competency Levels.- Quality of Measurement and Sample Size.- Missing Data:  What should I do?.- Combining Scales.- [NAME] Measurement.- The Rasch Model and Item Response Theory Models:  Identical, Similar, or Unique?.- What Tables to Use?.- Key Resources for Continued Expansion of Your Understanding of [NAME] Measurement.- Where Have We Been & What’s Next?. | Rasch Analysis in the Human Sciences helps individuals, both students and researchers, master the key concepts and resources needed to use [NAME] techniques for analyzing data from assessments to measure variables such as abilities, attitudes, and personality traits. Upon completion of the text, readers will be able to confidently evaluate the strengths and weakness of existing instrumentation, compute linear person measures and item measures, interpret [NAME], utilize [NAME] software, and understand what it means to measure in the Human Sciences.Each of the 24 chapters presents a key concept using a mix of theory and application of user-friendly [NAME] software. Chapters also include a beginning and ending dialogue between two typical researchers learning [NAME], 'Formative Assessment Check Points,' sample data files, an extensive set of application activities with answers, a one paragraph sample research article text integrating the chapter topic, quick-tips, and suggested readings. [NAME] in the Human Sciences will be an essential resource for anyone wishing to begin, or expand, their learning of [NAME] measurement techniques, be it in the Health Sciences, Market Research, Education, or Psychology. | <p>Offers step-by-step instruction on how-to use [NAME] analysis </p><p>Features a combination of [NAME] conversations, Rasch data analyses, [NAME] theory, and formative assessments </p><p>Written for a broad audience as an introductory text: light on the mathematics, heavy on the practical aspects, and clear on the concepts and theory </p><p>All activities and tables utilize user-friendly (and free) [NAME] software  that prepares readers to confidently utilize [NAME] software</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7154-3 | Education | Chernoff | [NAME]; [NAME] | Probabilistic Thinking | Presenting Plural Perspectives | Advances in Mathematics Education |  | 1 | 2014 | 704 | Hard cover | Book | XVI, 704 p. 153 illus. | 0 | final | 169.99 | 181.89 | 186.99 | 153 | 226.5 | English | Education | SCO25000 | Mathematics Education | JNU | SCM27004 | Probability Theory and Stochastic Processes | PBT | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  | SERIES PREFACE: [NAME] and [NAME] Sriraman.- [NAME]: [NAME] Devlin.- INTRODUCTION: [NAME] and Bharath Sriraman.- PERSPECTIVE I: MATHEMATICS AND PHILOSOPHY.- Preface to Perspective I: Mathematics and Philosophy: [NAME] and [NAME] Russell.- I.I. A historical and philosophical perspective on probability: [NAME] and Ramesh Kapadia.- I.II. From puzzles and paradoxes to concepts in probability: [NAME] and [NAME]. Three approaches for modeling situation with randomness: [NAME] and [NAME] Vogel.- I.IV. A modeling perspective on probability: Maxine Pfannkuch and Ilze Ziedins.- Commentary on Perspective I: Mathematics and Philosophy: [NAME] and Kyeong-Hwa Lee.- PERSPECTIVE II: PSYCHOLOGY.- Preface to Perspective II: Psychology : [NAME] II.I. Statistical thinking: no child left behind: [NAME] and Gerd Gigerenzer.- II.II. The A-B-C of probabilistic literacy: [NAME] Martignon.- II.III. Intuitive conceptions of probability and the development of basic math skills: [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] II.IV. Testing a model on probabilistic reasoning: [NAME] and Caterina Primi.- II.V. Revisiting the medical diagnosis problem: reconciling intuitive and analytical thinking: [NAME] and Uri Leron.- II.VI. Rethinking probability education: perceptual judgment as epistemic resource: Dor Abrahamson.- II.VII. Sticking to your guns: a flawed heuristic for probabilistic decision-making: [NAME] Bennett.- II.VIII. Developing probabilistic thinking: what about peoples’ conceptions: Annie Savard.- Commentary I on Perspective II: Psychology : [NAME] Greer.- Commentary II on Perspective II: Psychology: [NAME] and Bharath Sriraman.- PERSPECTIVE III: STOCHASTICS.- Preface to Perspective III: Stochastics: [NAME] and Egan Chernoff.- III.I. Prospective primary school teachers’ perception of randomness: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and Blanca Ruiz.- III.II. Challenges of developing coherent probabilistic reasoning: rethinking randomness and probability from a stochastic perspective: [NAME] and [NAME] III.III. “It is very, very random because it doesn’t happen very often”: examining learners’ discourse on randomness: [NAME], [NAME] and Nathalie Sinclair.- III.IV. Developing a modelling approach to probability using computer-based simulations: Theodosia Prodromou.- III.V. Promoting statistical literacy through data modelling in the early school years: Lyn D. English.- III.VI. Learning Bayesian statistics in adulthood: [NAME] Commentary on Perspective III: Stochastics: [NAME] Shaughnessy.- PERSPECTIVE IV: MATHEMATICS EDUCATION.- Preface to Perspective IV: Mathematics Education: [NAME] and [NAME] Chernoff.- IV.I. A practitional perspective on probabilistic thinking models and frameworks: [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Hertel.- IV.II. Experimentation in probability teaching and learning: Per Nilsson.- IV.III. Investigating the dynamics of stochastic learning processes: [NAME] and [NAME] Schnell.- IV.IV. Counting as a foundation for learning to reason about probability: [NAME] and Anoop Ahluwalia.- IV.V. Levels of probabilistic reasoning of high school students about binomial problems: [NAME] and [NAME] Landín.- IV.VI. Children’s construction of sample space with respect to the law of large numbers: Efi Paparistodemou.- IV.VII. Researching conditional probability problem solving: [NAME] Huerta.- IV.VIII. Real life experiences as hindrance in probabilistic situations: [NAME] and Rina Zazkis.- IV.IX. Influence of culture on high school students’ probabilistic thinking: [NAME] Sharma.- IV.X. Primary school students’ attitudes to and beliefs about probability: [NAME] and Anne Williams.- | This volume provides a necessary, current and extensive analysis of probabilistic thinking from a number of mathematicians, mathematics educators, and psychologists. The work of 58 contributing authors, investigating probabilistic thinking across the globe, is encapsulated in 6 prefaces, 29 chapters and 6 commentaries. Ultimately, the four main perspectives presented in this volume (Mathematics and Philosophy, Psychology, Stochastics and Mathematics Education) are designed to represent probabilistic thinking in a greater context. | <p>Encapsulates the dawn of a new phase of research investigating probabilistic thinking in mathematics education</p><p><p>Further advances research investigating probabilistic thinking as a mainstream topic in mathematics education</p><p><p>Represents a rich repository of a range of studies from a global cast of researchers</p><p><p>Presents multiple perspectives (mathematics and philosophy, psychology, stochastics and mathematics education) representing probabilistic thinking in a greater context</p><p><p>With commentaries from prominent individuals well versed in mathematics education research</p><p><p>Anthological and future-oriented with the explicit purpose of becoming a standard reference book for those investigating probabilistic thinking</p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7231-1 | Education | Edgecombe | [NAME]; [NAME] | Clinical Learning and Teaching Innovations in Nursing | Dedicated Education Units Building a Better Future | Innovation and Change in Professional Education | 10 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 170 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | [NAME] | Professional & Vocational Education | JNRV | SCO36000 | Higher Education | JNM | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword/Preface.- Introduction.- SECTION I.- 1. Dedicated Education Unit: the concept.- 2. The Dedicated Education Unit as a community of practice.- 3. SECTION II: STORYLINES I: DEUs IN PRACTICE.- 3. An ‘idea whose time had come’: The Flinders University School of Nursing DEU — an historical perspective.- 4. The Canberra DEU.- 5. An American experience: transition to the DEU Clinical Education Model.- 6. Dedicated Education Units: Christchurch Polytechnic Institute of Technology and Canterbury District Health Board (CPIT/CDHB), New Zealand.- 7. Dedicated Educational Unit (DEU) – A Scandinavian Model.- 8. Telling it like it is - Various authors writing about personal experience of DEUs.- SECTION III.- 9. From conceptualisation to future expansion: keys to successful DEU implementation and sustainability.- Conclusion.   ​ | This book provides an in-depth insight into the Dedicated Education Units (DEU) clinical learning strategy. It shows how DEUs work and explains the concept, philosophy, principles, practical implementation and first-hand experiences of this ground-breaking, global work-integrated learning strategy. It presents the benefits of DEUs and offers insight into how DEUs can provide real options for solving the increasingly complex dilemma of providing more students with more experiences of hands-on practice while reducing costs and ensuring greater numbers of work ready graduates. The book serves as a reference for nurse student education and is particularly salient for those setting up a DEU. It can be used as a springboard for work-integrated learning innovations for all practice-based disciplines.Dedicated Education Units (DEU) provide a flexible clinical learning strategy with a focus on founding principles and adaptation to different clinical contexts rather than a concrete model for clinical learning. DEUs are essentially clinical environments in which students develop a sense of security to explore learning opportunities, knowing there are people present who will ensure they do not make intractable errors; people who will guide and support them to achieve optimal learning. Whilst developed initially for nurse education, DEUs can be adapted to other professional learning settings. | <p>Offers unique, first-hand clinician, student, academic and management evaluations and experiences of Dedicated Education Units (DEUs)   </p><p>Gives practical examples of the processes, structure and resources needed to develop and run DEUs in varied contexts    </p><p>Blends pedagogy with the lived experiences of those working with DEUs in Australia, New Zealand, the USA and Sweden ​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6939-7 | Education | Harpaz | [NAME] | Teaching and Learning in a Community of Thinking | The Third Model |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 196 | Hard cover | Book | X, 196 p. 9 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO22000 | Learning & Instruction | JNT | SCO38000 | Educational Philosophy | JNA | Education | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword; David Perkins.- Preface.- Introduction.- Part One: Teaching and Learning in a Community of Thinking: the Context.- Part Two: Teaching and Learning in a Community of Thinking: the Theory.- Part Three: Teaching and Learning in a Community of Thinking: the Practice.- Appendix: An Inside Picture: Conversations with Teachers of Communities of Thinking.- References. | This book explores a new pedagogical model called The Third Model, which places the encounter between the child and the curriculum at the center of educational theory and practice. The Third Model is implemented in an alternative classroom called Community of Thinking. Teaching and learning in a Community of Thinking is based on three 'stations': the fertile question; research; and concluding performance. The essence of a Community of Thinking is the formation of a group of students and teachers who grapple with a troubling question to which they do not know the answer at the outset – and sometimes even at the end of their investigation. The Community of Thinking framework is supported by a whole school model – the Intel-Lect School. The model, or parts of it, is currently implemented in schools in Israel, England, Australia, and New Zealand.The book suggests a new pedagogical narrative based on alternative 'atomic pictures' of learning, teaching, knowledge, mind and the aim of education, and a systematic pedagogical practice based on this narrative. | <p>The first to bridge child-centered and curriculum-based models of schooling   </p><p>Sums up in an original way the leading educational insights of the last three decades        </p><p>Provides a new horizon for education</p><p> </p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7228-1 | Education | Hopkins | [NAME] | Citizenship and Democracy in Further and Adult Education |  | Lifelong Learning Book Series | 18 | 1 | 2014 | 190 | Hard cover | Book | X, 190 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO42000 | Lifelong Learning/Adult Education | JNP | SCO38000 | Educational Philosophy | JNA | Education | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction.- 2. Citizenship and Political Philosophy.- 3. Further and Adult Education: An Overview of Citizenship.- 4. The Apprenticeship Tradition in Further Education.- 5. Vocational Education: A European Perspective.- 6. The Self-Help Tradition in Adult Education.- 7. [NAME] and Deliberative Democracy.- 8. Conclusion.- References.- Index. | This book addresses the questions why citizenship education is an important subject for students in further and adult education and why we need democratic colleges to support the study of citizenship education. It investigates the historical roots of further and adult education and identifies how the adoption of citizenship education in the post-compulsory sector can enrich vocational studies in further education and programmes in adult education. It is argued that democratic colleges are vital to ensure that citizenship education informs the decision-making process throughout educational institutions (and as a means of establishing fair and equal representation for important stakeholders). The author has worked in both sectors for over a decade, and uses this experience to offer a blend of educational practice and philosophical investigation. The result is a work that appeals to both teachers in further and adult education as well as academics and students interested in philosophy of education.​ | Clear linking of theory to educational practice regarding citizenship education in both further and adult education<br><br>Strong philosophical and historical underpinning<br><br>Includes a discussion of current policies in further and adult education<br><br>Explores an area currently neglected within the educational and philosophical literature ​ | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-38290-1 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME];   Kinshuk; [NAME] | The New Development of Technology Enhanced Learning: Concept, Research and Best Practices |  | Lecture Notes in Educational Technology |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 300 p. | 0 | approx. | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO21000 | Educational Technology | YQT |  |  |  | Education | Contributed volume | Springer [NAME] | Planned | 2013-09-17 00:00:00 |  |  |  | The book will address the main issues concerned with the new development of learning processes, innovative pedagogies changes, effects of new technologies on education, future learning content, which aims to gather the newest concepts, research and best practices on the frontiers of technology enhanced learning from the aspects of learning, pedagogies, and technologies in learning in order to draw a picture of technology enhanced learning in the near future. Some issues like “e-learning ... m-learning ... u-learning – innovative approaches” , “the Framework and Method for Understanding the New Generation Students”, “Context-aware Mobile Role Playing Game for Learning”, “ Pedagogical issues in content creation and use: IT literacy through Spoken Tutorials”, “ Supporting collaborative knowledge construction and discourse in the classroom”, “Digital Systems for Hierarchical Open Access to Education”, “ Using Annotated Patient Records to Teach Clinical Reasoning to Under- graduate Students of Medicine”, “ Utilizing Cognitive Skills Ontology for Designing Personalized Learning Environments”, “Using Interactive Mobile Technologies to Develop Operating Room Technologies Competency” will be discussed in each chapter.​ | <p>Presenting the most frontier of educational technology ongoing around the world </p><p>Showing the effective research methods on the newly emerging phenomenon in education </p><p>Guiding researches and practices in future educational technology​</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-3177-0 | Education | Ifenthaler | Dirk Ifenthaler; [NAME] | Digital Knowledge Maps in Higher Education | Technology-Enhanced Support for Teachers and Learners |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 300 | Hard cover | Book | L, 300 p. 50 illus. | 0 | approx. | 139.95 | 149.75 | 153.94 | 126.5 | 186.5 | English | Education | SCO21000 | Educational Technology | YQT | SCO22000 | Learning & Instruction | JNT | Education | Contributed volume | Springer New York | Planned | 2013-12-06 00:00:00 |  |  | ​​ ​-Current issues in concept mapping for higher education. -Theories of metacognitive tools in education. -Framework for implementation of concept maps in higher education. -Case studies: Institutional scenarios and specific implementations. -Innovative pedagogy and educational transformation. -Research using digital concept maps. | Digital knowledge maps are ‘at a glance’ visual representations that enable enriching, imaginative and transformative ways for teaching and learning, with the potential to enhance positive educational outcomes.​​​ The use of such maps has generated much attention and interest among tertiary education practitioners and researchers over the last few years as higher education institutions around the world begin to invest heavily into new technologies designed to provide online spaces within which to build resources and conduct activities. The key elements of this edited volume will comprise original and innovative contributions toexisting scholarship in this field, with examples of pedagogical possibilities as they are currently practised across a range of contexts. It will contain chapters that address, theory, research and practical issues related to the use of digital knowledge maps in all aspects of tertiary education and draws predominantly on international perspectives with a diverse group of invited contributors.Reports on empirical studies as well as theoretical/conceptual chapters that engage deeply with pertinent questions and issues raised from a pedagogical, social, cultural,philosophical, and/or ethical standpoint are incuded. Systematic literature reviews and meta analyses dealing with digital knowledge mapping in tertiary education are also an integral part of the volume. | Provides the only cross-disciplinary model for creating digital knowledge maps in  higher education     Includes concrete examples of technology enhanced curriculum design prototypes utilizing digital knowledge maps  Facilitates transformative teaching and learning through the use of digital knowledge maps    ​ | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7157-4 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME] | Lexical Availability in English and Spanish as a Second Language |  | Educational Linguistics | 17 | 1 | 2014 | 300 | Hard cover | Book | XVI, 300 p. 23 illus., 14 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO23000 | Language Education | CJ | SCN13000 | Applied Linguistics | CB | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface .- 1. Lexical Availability Studies .- Part I . 2. Lexical Availability of Basic and Advanced Semantic Categories in English L1 and English L2 .- 3. The Effect of Age on EFL Learners’ Lexical Availability: Word Responses to the Cue Words ‘Town’ and ‘Countryside’ .- 4. The Incidence of Previous Foreign Language Contact in a Lexical Availability Task. A Study of Senior Learners .- 5. Lexical Variation in Learners’ Responses to Cue Words: The Effect of Gender .- 6. Frequency Profiles of EFL Learners’ Lexical Availability .- Part II . 7. The Relationship of Language Proficiency to the Lexical Availability of Learners of Spanish .- 8. [NAME] in English and Spanish .- 9. The Effect of Instruction on Polish Spanish Learners’ Lexical Availability .- 10. Cognitive Factors of Lexical Availability in a Second Language .- Conclusion .- 11. Researching Lexical Availability in L2: some Methodological Issues. | ​ This volume contributes to the research in two different research areas: lexical availability studies and vocabulary research in second or foreign languages. Lexical availability is defined as the words that immediately come to mind as a response to a stimulus provided by topics related to domains closely connected to daily life: for instance animals, food and drink, daily activities, politics, or poverty. Lexical availability is a dimension of learners’ receptive and productive lexical competence, and, consequently, an important variable of learners’ communicative competence. Written by leading researchers in Spanish and English applied linguistics, the studies presented in this volume offer the reader findings and insights from studies conducted in learners with different mother tongues, who learn English or Spanish as their second or third language. “This book made me aware of an approach to vocabulary acquisition which has a long tradition in European research, but has been somewhat neglected by English-speaking researchers. The methodology was pioneered in France where it developed into the Francais Fondamental project - an influential approach to the vocabulary needs of learners of French. It was also taken up by Spanish researchers, and more recently developed by the team at La Rioja University. Where English-language research has focused on the frequency of words in large corpora and the implications of this feature for L2 vocabulary acquisition, the lexical availability tradition takes a much more learner-centred approach to L2 vocabulary skills, directly reflecting learners' needs and learners' ability to do things with small, effective vocabularies. This leads to a set of research priorities that look refreshingly different from the ones we are used to. Read this book. It might change the way you think about vocabulary research.” [NAME], Swansea University, Wales, UK | <p>​A timely volume on lexical availability in learners of English or Spanish as a second or third language </p><p>Integrates studies on lexical availability in two of the world's most widely spoken languages </p><p>Using original data from learners of English or Spanish in Chile, Great Britain, Poland, Slovenia, and Spain</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | [PHONE]-29-1 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME] | Literacy and Language in East Asia | Shifting  Meanings, Values and [NAME] | Education in the Asia-Pacific Region: Issues, Concerns and Prospects | 24 | 1 | 2014 | 165 | Hard cover | Book | XXII, 165 p. 4 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO40000 | Literacy | CFC | SCO13000 | International and Comparative Education | JN | Education | Monograph | Springer Singapore | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Acknowledgements.- Introduction.- What is literacy and why is it important?.- High Stakes Testing, Literacy Wars, Globalisation and Asia.- League Tables and the Politics of Ranking.- Global Testing: PISA, TIMSS and PIRLS.- International Testing: The Global Education Space Race?.- Schooling, national development and growth in Asia.- The “East Asian Miracle” economies, inequalities and [NAME] and workforce capabilities.- The New Dynamic and shifting approaches literacy and language in East Asia. | This book critically explores why some Asian nations are on top of the world in students’ achievement tests in reading and literacy, yet governments and industry in these nations are anxious about a crisis in education. Why are governments anxious about the capabilities and skills of school and university graduates in a global economy when there is a Asian economic boom?  The authors explore questions about how the Asian countries value test-based examination curriculum and its influence on the practices of teaching learning and the lives of young people in Asia. The authors describe the challenge of change for East Asian nations to develop more relevant approaches to literacy and language and more inclusive societies focussed on the needs of young people and not exam results. | <p>A critical analysis of the high performing East Asian nations and the “contests” and “league tables” derived from international literacy and numeracy achievement tests</p><p>Argues for education systems to embrace reforms that promote capabilities which prepare students for life and work in modern and globalised communities</p><p>A unique approach that departs from traditional country study approaches and seeks to identify how each nation has been influenced by cross national policy borrowing</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7024-9 | Education | Knight | [NAME] | International Education Hubs | Student, Talent, Knowledge-Innovation Models |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 246 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 246 p. 3 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO13000 | International and Comparative Education | JN | SCO36000 | Higher Education | JNM | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Dedication.- 1. Introduction; [NAME] Knight.- 2. Understanding Education Hubs within the Context of Crossborder Education; [NAME] Knight.- 3. An Analytical Framework for  [NAME], Talent, Knowledge-Innovation; [NAME] and [NAME]. The Evolution of Qatar as an Education Hub: Moving to a Knowledge Economy; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Knight.- 5. United Arab Emirates Education Hub: A Decade of Development; [NAME] and [NAME] Shamisi.- 6. Hong Kong: The Quest for Regional Education Hub Status; [NAME] and [NAME] Bodycott.- 7. Malaysia: Becoming an Education Hub to Serve National Development; [NAME] and Doria Abdullah.- 8. Singapore: Building a Knowledge and Education Hub; [NAME], Ho Kong-Chong and  [NAME] 9. Botswana: Africa’s First Education Hub; Bridget Poppy [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Mokopakgosi.- 10. Emerging Education Hubs: Korea, Sri Lanka, [NAME], Bahrain; [NAME] and [NAME] Knight.- 11. Comparative Analysis of Education Hubs; [NAME] Knight.- 12. Issues, Indicators, and Reflections; [NAME] Knight.- Bibliography.- Index. | Education hubs are the newest development in the international higher education landscape. Countries, zones and cities are trying to position themselves as reputed centres for higher education and research.  But given higher education’s current preoccupation with competitiveness, branding, and economic  benefits are education hubs merely a fad, a branding exercise, or are they an important innovation worthy of serious investment and attention?  This book tries to answer the question through a systematic and comparative analysis of the rationales, actors, policies, plans and accomplishments for six serious country level education hubs - United Arab Emirates, Qatar, Malaysia, Hong Kong, Singapore and Botswana . The in-depth case studies shows that 'one size does not fit all'. A variety of factors drive countries to prepare and position themselves as an education hub. They include income generation, soft power, modernization of domestic tertiary education sector, economic competitiveness, need for trained work force, and most importantly a desire to move towards a knowledge or service based economy. In response to these different motivations, three different types of education hubs are being developed: the student hub, talent hub, and knowledge/innovation hub.[NAME], policy makers, professionals, students and senior decision makers from education, economics, geography, public policy, trade, migration will find that this book challenges some assumptions about crossborder education and provides new insights and information. | <p>The first systematic study completed on the new development of International Education Hubs </p><p>Presents evidence and analysis supporting the finding that there are three types of International Education Hubs emerging: Student, Talent and Knowledge-Innovation</p><p>Wide geographic coverage - includes analysis of 10 education hubs in Asia, Africa and the Gulf region </p><p>Places the development of education hubs within the broader frameworks of crossborder education and internationalization</p><p> </p><p> </p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6990-8 | Education | Kutnick | [NAME]; [NAME] | Effective Group Work in Primary School Classrooms | The SPRinG Approach | Professional Learning and Development in Schools and Higher Education | 8 | 1 | 2014 | 212 | Hard cover | Book | XXII, 212 p. 2 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO22000 | Learning & Instruction | JNT | SCY12040 | Child and School Psychology | JMC | Education | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- 1. Can the grouping of children in classrooms affect their learning: an introduction to social pedagogy.- 2. Groups and classrooms.- 3. The SPRinG Project: the intervention programme and the evaluation methods.- 4. SPRinG at Key Stage 1: Effective group work with young children.- 5. Improving the effectiveness of collaborative group work at KS2: effects on pupil attainment, classroom behaviour and attitudes.- 6. ScotSPRinG: The effects of group work in Scottish primary schools on attainment, interaction and classroom relationships: Relational familiarity and class composition on support for group work; [NAME] Tolmie.- 7. Teachers’ experiences of implementing the SPRinG Programme in schools; [NAME] Baines.- 8. Conclusions: The contribution of SPRinG to knowledge about collaborative group work. | This book offers a challenge to traditional approaches to classroom teaching and pedagogy. The SPRinG (Social Pedagogic Research into Groupwork) project, part of a larger research programme on teaching and learning funded by the Economic and Social Research Council (ESRC), was developed to enhance the learning potential of pupils working in classroom groups by actively involving teachers in a programme designed to raise levels of group work during typical classroom learning activities. Internationally, the SPRinG project is the largest evaluation of effective group working methods in comparison to traditional teaching, with findings that show raised levels of pupil achievement and a doubling of sustained, active engagement in learning. The opening chapters present arguments regarding the relationship of social interaction and children’s cognitive development and examine theories that explain why social interactional processes should be integrated into primary school pedagogic practices.  Next, the book describes the conceptual and methodological basis for the SPRinG studies, especially its focus on the relational approach, the type of involvement of teachers and classroom planning. Further chapters present key results and describe the background and methods used to establish SPRinG-based effects on pupil progress in mathematics, literacy and science, including both macro and micro assessments; how the SPRinG approach affected pupil-pupil interactions and teacher-pupil interactions, as measured by systematic on-the-spot observations and analyses of videotapes of groups working on specially designed tasks work; and effects on pupil self-completed measures of motivation and attitudes to group work.The book also analyses reflections of teachers who have worked with SPRinG: moving from theory to practice as well as adding insights associated with implementing SPRinG principles in schools. Drawing upon developmental psychological, social psychological and classroom research, it develops a new and ambitious social pedagogic approach to classroom learning, with a stress on group work, which will be of interest to researchers, teachers and policy-makers.This book includes contributions from [NAME] and [NAME], who were also involved in the ScotSPRinG and SPRinG projects. | <p>Offers a major contribution to understanding and evidence on collaborative group work that challenges traditional approaches to teaching and pedagogy<br>Develops a new and ambitious social pedagogic approach to classroom learning and group work<br>Makes a substantial contribution to our knowledge of teaching and learning, particularly in the context of seeking more active forms of learning using more diverse forms of pedagogy</p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-90-481-3930-9 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Teaching Science with Geospatial Technology | Designing Effective Professional Development for Secondary Teachers |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 325 | Hard cover | Book | 325p. | 0 | approx. | 139 | 148.73 | 152.9 | 125 | 199.5 | English | Education | SCO27000 | Science Education | JNU | SCJ13000 | Geographical Information Systems/Cartography | [NAME] | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  |  | The emerging field of using geospatial technology to teach science and environmental education presents an excellent opportunity to discover the ways in which educators use research-grounded pedagogical commitments in combination with their practical experiences to design and implement effective teacher professional development projects. Often missing from the literature are in-depth, explicit discussions of why and how educators choose to provide certain experiences and resources for the teachers with whom they work, and the resulting outcomes.  The first half of this book will enable science and environmental educators to share the nature and structure of large scale professional development projects while discussing the theoretical commitments that undergird their work. Many chapters will include temporal aspects that present the ways in which projects change over time in response to evaluative research and practical experience. In the second half of the book, faculty and others whose focus is on national and international scales will share the ways in which they are working to meet the growing needs of teachers across the globe to incorporate geospatial technology into their science teaching. These efforts reflect the ongoing conversations in science education, geography, and the geospatial industry in ways that embody the opportunities and challenges inherent to this field.  This edited book will serve to define the field of teacher professional development for teaching science using geospatial technology. As such, it will identify short term and long term objectives for science, environmental, and geography educators involved in these efforts. As a result, this book will provide a framework for future projects and research in this exciting and growing field. | <P>Fills in gap in literature on the emerging and rapidly growing field of geospatial technology in classroom settings</P> <P>Geospatial technology is highly motivational for students and builds their skills in data analysis, problem solving, and spatial thinking</P> <P>First resource that relates specifically to teaching science with geospatial technology</P> <P>First volume to explore design principles of teacher professional development in the context of geospatial technology</P> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7084-3 | Education | Maldonado Maldonado | Alma Maldonado Maldonado; [NAME] | The Forefront of International Higher Education | A Festschrift in Honor of [NAME] | Higher Education Dynamics | 42 | 1 | 2014 | 368 | Hard cover | Book | VIII, 368 p. 3 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO36000 | Higher Education | JNM | SCO13000 | International and Comparative Education | JN | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction; [NAME] and [NAME] Bassett.- 2. The Complexity of Higher Education. A Career in Academics and Activism; [NAME] 1: Academic Profession.- PART 2: Internationalization of Higher Education.- PART 3: Academic Mobility.- PART 4: Regional Perspectives.- PART 5: Global Perspectives.- PART 6: World-Class Universities.- PART 7: [NAME]—The Teacher.- 25. [NAME]; [NAME] and [NAME]. | This book honors the academic trajectory and global impact of [NAME], one of the most important education comparativists worldwide for over forty years. From his early writings on India and student activism to his recent work on research universities, Altbach has served as a key developer of the expansion of the field to include comparative higher education. His capacity to find, support, and gather the best minds around the world, to organize research teams in order to explore the most relevant issues on comparative higher education has earned him international recognition. His service to the field of comparative higher education is invaluable and incomparable. This festschrift contains original pieces from colleagues and former students following a twofold discussion: the most relevant topics on comparative higher education and particular Altbach’s contributions to this field of work. | Honors [NAME] as a founding father of the field of international and comparative higher education<br><br>Makes a fresh examination of the current state of the field of comparative higher education, with experts from different schools of thought and academic traditions<br><br>Contrasts some of the most important tendencies in this field | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7027-0 | Education | Musselin | [NAME]; [NAME] | Reforming Higher Education | Public Policy Design and Implementation | Higher Education Dynamics | 41 | 1 | 2014 | 235 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 235 p. 6 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO36000 | Higher Education | JNM | SCO19000 | Educational Policy and Politics | JNF | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction.- PART 1: Designing Policies in Higher Education.- 2. Public Policy Design and University Reform.- 3. Reforming Universities in Italy: Towards a New Paradigm?- 4. The UK Research Excellence Framework and the Transformation of Research Production.- PART 2: The Complexities of Policy Design in Higher Education – Some Lessons from Comparative Research.- 5. Reforming the Portuguese Public Sector: A Route from Health to Higher Education.- 6. Higher Education, Globalization and the Restructuring of the State: A Comparison between British Columbia, Ontario and Québec.- 7. Patterns of University Governance: Insights Based on an Analysis of Doctoral Education’s Management Reform in Switzerland and Norway.- PART 3: Policy Effects at the [NAME] Level.- 8. Governance of Universities and Scientific Innovation.- 9. Change is in the Air: Pressures, Organizations, Fields and University Research.- 10. Reforming Faculties’ Careers: Changes in [NAME] and Trajectories.- 11. The Possible Conflict between New and Old Governance in the Introduction of Performance Based Funding in German Medical Faculties.- Index. | This book analyzes the reforms that led to a differentiated landscape of higher education systems after university practices and governance were considered poorly adapted to contemporary settings and to their new missions. This has led to a growing institutional differentiation in many higher education systems. This differentiation has certainly contributed to making the institutional landscape more diverse across and within higher education systems. This book covers this diversity. Each part corresponds to a different but complementary way of looking at reforms and highlights what can be learnt on specific cases by adopting a specific perspective. The first part analyzes the ongoing reforms and their evolution, identifies their internal contradictions, as well as the redefinitions and reorientations they experience, and reveals the ideas, representations, ideologies and theories on which they are built. The second part includes comparison between countries but also other comparative perspectives such as how one reform is developed in different regions of the same country, as well as how comparable reforms are declined to different sectors. The last part addresses the impact of the reforms. What is known about the effectiveness of such instruments on higher education systems? This part shows that reforms provoke new power games and reconfigure power relations. | Entails case studies of higher education policies from construction to implementation<br>Offers a mix of conceptual papers and empirical approaches that illustrate the proposed conceptual perspectives<br>Adopts a comparative approach regarding reforms in higher education | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-7578-1 | Education | O'Neil | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Teaching and Measuring Cognitive Readiness |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 369 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 369 p. 60 illus., 35 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Education | SCO39000 | Educational Psychology | JNC | SCO21000 | Educational Technology | YQT | Education | Contributed volume | Springer US | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Part I Theory/Context.- What Is Cognitive Readiness?.- The Evolving Definition of Cognitive Readiness for Military Operations.- Learning and Assessment: 21st Century Skills and Cognitive Readiness.- A Model for Instruction and Assessment of Cognitive Readiness.- Situational Load and Personal Attributes: Implications for Cognitive Readiness, [NAME], and Training.- The Development and Assessment of Cognitive Readiness: Lessons Learned from K-12 Education.- Cognitive Readiness for Solving Equations.- What Problem Solvers Know: Cognitive Readiness for Adaptive Problem Solving.- A Theoretically-Based Approach to Cognitive Readiness and Situation Awareness Assessment.- Adaptive Expertise and Cognitive Readiness: A Perspective from the Expert-Performance Approach.- Part II Cognitive Readiness Applications.- Creative Thinking Abilities: Measures for Various Domains.- Using Analogies as a Basis for Teaching Cognitive Readiness.- Simulation Assessment of Cognitive Readiness.- Assessing Cognitive Readiness in a Simulation-based Training Environment.- Software Support for Teaching and Measuring Cognitive Readiness.- Cognitive Readiness for Complex Team Performance.- Impact of Individual Game-Based Training on Team Cognitive Readiness. | Teaching and Measuring Cognitive Readiness presents theoretical and empirical findings regarding cognitive readiness and assessments of their impact on adult learning. The term readiness is used in assessing student preparation for K-12 schools, while in the military and in industry, 'readiness' denotes preparation to be effective in performing a mission or a job. Cognitive Readiness is viewed through a Knowledge, Skills, and [NAME] (KSA) lens.  Teaching and Measuring Cognitive Readiness deals with (a) the primacy of cognitive readiness as attributes or individual difference variables; (b) the need for cognitive readiness instructional and assessment strategies; (c) the need to integrate assessment into cognitive readiness training; (d) the need for theory-driven evaluation studies to increase knowledge and efficacy in teaching cognitive readiness; and (e) the need for a solid psychometric approach to the use of cognitive readiness assessments. | <P>Addresses an important component of adult learning</P> <P>Brings together several disciplines on the construct of readiness</P> <P>Addresses an&nbsp;increasingly important topic in teaching and learning research</P> | Science | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6808-6 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME]; Dhaneesh Kumar | A Companion to Research in Education |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 888 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 888 p. 15 illus., 10 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 169.99 | 181.89 | 186.99 | 153 | 226.5 | English | Education | SCO29000 | Sociology of Education | JN | SCE36000 | Philosophy of the Social Sciences | HPS | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. PART I: CONCEPTUALISING RESEARCH IN EDUCATION.- 2. PART II: CHARACTERISING RESEARCH IN EDUCATION.- 3. PART III: CONTEXTUALISING RESEARCH IN EDUCATION.- 4. PART IV: LEGITIMATING RESEARCH IN EDUCATION.- 5. PART V: REPRESENTING RESEARCH IN EDUCATION.​ | This volume offers a unique commentary on the diverse ways that educational inquiry is conceived, designed and critiqued. An international team of scholars examines cross-cutting themes of how research in education is conceptualised, characterised, contextualised, legitimated and represented. Contributions include specially commissioned essays, critical commentaries, vignettes, dialogues and cases. Each section discusses the significance of a complex terrain of ideas and critiques that can inform thinking and practice in educational research. The result is a thorough and accessible volume that offers fresh insights into the perspectives and challenges that shape diverse genres of research in education. ​ | <p>Invaluable guide for advanced students and specialists in educational research </p><p>Addresses key debates in the areas of conceptualizing, contextualizing, representing and legitimating educational research </p><p>Looks at these key issues in relation to contemporary trends in educational research </p><p>Exciting new and needed approach in educational research </p><p>Breaks from the standard paradigms and methods ‘coverage’</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | [PHONE]-35-2 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Global Teachers, Australian Perspectives | Goodbye Mr Chips, Hello [NAME] |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 180 p. 40 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO29000 | Sociology of Education | JN | [NAME] | Migration | [NAME] | Education | Monograph | Springer Singapore | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | ​Introduction .- Chapter 1) Introduction.- Chapter 2) Globalizing Teachers: policy and theoretical dimensions.- Chapter 3) Immigrant Teachers in Australia: Quantitative Insights.- Chapter 4) Global Teachers’ Pathways to Australia.- Chapter 5) The Capital Reconversion of Global Teachers in Australia.- Chapter 6) Internationally Educated Teachers’ Critiques of Tests of their Employability.- Chapter 7) Global Teachers Living and Teaching in Australia.- Chapter 8) Goodbye ‘Mr Chips’: the global mobility of Australian-educated teachers.- Chapter 9) Revisiting [NAME] and Mr Chips. | This is the first book on global teachers and the increasingly important phenomenon of ‘brain circulation’ in the global teaching profession. A teaching qualification is a passport to an international professional career: the global teacher is found in more and more classrooms around the world today. It is a two-way movement. This book looks at the growing importance of immigrant teachers in western countries today and at teachers who exit from western countries (emigrant teachers) seeking teaching experience in other countries. Drawing on the international literature in Europe, North America, Asia and elsewhere supplemented by rich insights derived from recent Australian research, the book outlines the personal, institutional and structural processes nationally and internationally underlying the increasing global circulation of teachers. It identifies the key drivers of global teacher mobility:  a range of factors including family, lifestyle, classroom experience, travel, opportunities for advancement, discipline, linguistic skills, taxation rates, cultural factors and institutional frameworks and policy support. The book is the first detailed contemporary account of the experiences of Australian immigrant and emigrant teachers in the schools and communities where they teach and live. It makes an important and original theoretical and empirical contribution to the contemporary fields of sociology of education and immigration studies. | <p>The first detailed contemporary account of the experiences of global teachers in Australia</p><p>Important text for the fields of sociology of education and immigration studies for undergraduate and postgraduate levels</p><p>Contributes to the international literature across the globe regarding the mobility of professionals</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6921-2 | Education | Renck Jalongo | [NAME] | Teaching Compassion - Humane Education in Early Childhood |  | Educating the Young Child | 8 | 1 | 2014 | 242 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 242 p. 5 illus., 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO37000 | Childhood Education | [NAME] | SCO22000 | Learning & Instruction | JNT | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword; [NAME] One: Foundations of Humane Education.- Editor’s Introduction.- 1. Humane Education and the Development of Empathy in Early Childhood:  Definition, Rationale and Outcomes; [NAME] Jalongo.- 2. Short-Term Interventions that Accomplish Humane Education Goals: An International Review of the Research; [NAME] and [NAME] Orihuela.- 3. Using Interactions between Children and Companion Animals to Build Skill in Self-Regulation and Emotional Regulation; Wanda Boyer.- 4. Teaching Preservice Early Childhood Educators about Humane Education; Tunde Szecsi.- 5. Humane Education and Education for Sustainable Development:  Educational Initiatives with Common Goals; [NAME] Two: Homes and Communities.- 6. Animals in the Family:  Antecedents of Compassion and Violence; [NAME] Stanek.- 7. Including Animals in Play Therapy for Young Children and Families; Risë VanFleet.- 8. Foundational Humane Education:  Love of Nature and Affinity for Animals; [NAME] Bires.- 9. Collaborating to Create Community Disaster Plans That Save Human and Animal Lives; Holly Travis.- Part Three: Humane Education in the Early Childhood Curriculum and Beyond.- 10. The Role of Therapy Animals in Promoting Humane Education Concepts; Lori Friesen.- 11. Beyond Words—Using Language and Literature to Teach Compassion for Others; [NAME]. Initiatives of Intermountain Therapy Animals, Inc. that Promote Humane Education; [NAME]. Guardians of the Earth:  Teaching Children to Care for All Living Things; [NAME] and [NAME] 14. Humane Education in the Early Childhood Science Curriculum; [NAME] Epilogue: The Promise of Humane Education in the Early Years; [NAME]. | In response to highly publicized incidents of school violence, educators across the United States and in many other nations are seeking effective ways to prevent and modify aggressive and anti-social behaviors in students. One of the major recommendations of the research is that efforts to prevent cruelty need to begin early, during the early childhood years of birth through age eight. The focus of Teaching Compassion: Humane Education in Early Childhood is guiding young children to accept responsibility for and to be kind in their interactions with fellow human beings, animals and the environment. Although humane education is a relatively new concept in the field of early childhood education, professionals in the field are very familiar with many of the related concepts, including: promoting positive interpersonal interactions, teaching children the skills of self-regulation, giving children experience in caring for living things and protecting the environment. This edited volume is an interdisciplinary compendium of professional wisdom gathered from experts in the fields of education, child development, science, psychology, sociology and humane organizations. As the book amply documents, the concept of humane education is powerful, integrative, timely and appropriate in work with young children.Teaching Compassion: Humane Education in Early Childhood shows how it is possible for adults dedicated to the care and education of young children to balance attention to the cognitive and affective realms and, in so doing, to elevate the overall quality of early childhood programs for children, families and communities. | <p>Shows how infusing humane education into the curriculum teaches children to be kind</p><p>Offers ideas to support the goal of promoting positive behavior in the very young</p><p>One of the first books to show what humane education in early childhood looks like in classrooms, teacher preparation and in the community</p><p>Gathers together the interdisciplinary perspectives of professionals dedicated to the care and education of the very young</p><p>Shows how the concept of humane education emphasizes both cognitive and affective goals </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6829-1 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Teaching and Research in Contemporary Higher Education | Systems, Activities and Rewards | The Changing Academy – The Changing Academic Profession in International Comparative Perspective | 9 | 1 | 2014 | 431 | Hard cover | Book | X, 431 p. 41 illus., 33 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Education | SCO13000 | International and Comparative Education | JN | SCO36000 | Higher Education | JNM | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: Teaching and Research in Contemporary Higher Education: An Overview; Cummings and Shin.- PART I. Theoretical Basis.- 2. The Teaching and Research Nexus in the Third Wave Age; Arimoto.- 3. The Research Role in Comparative Perspective; Cummings.- 4. Teaching and Curriculum Development across Countries; Huang.- PART II. [NAME] Systems.- 5. Teaching and Research in Germany: The Notions of University Professors; Teichler.- 6. Teaching and Research at Italian Universities: Continuities and Changes; Rostan.- 7. The Changing Balance of Teaching and Research in the Dutch Binary Higher Education System; De Weert and [NAME]. The Scholarly Question in Finland: to Teach or not to Teach; Aarrevaara, [NAME] and Postareff.- 9. Teaching and Research: perspectives from Portugal; Santiago, Sousa, Carvalho, Marchado-Taylor and Dias.- 10. Teaching and Research of Korean Academics across [NAME]; [NAME], [NAME] and Kim.- PART III. Teaching Focused Systems.- 11. The Divergent Worlds of Teaching and Research among Mexican Faculty: Tendencies and Implications; Galaz-Fontes, Martinez-Stack, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Sevilla-Garcia and Arcos-Vega.- 12. Research and Teaching in a Diverse Institutional Environment: Converging Values and [NAME] in Brazil; [NAME] and Balbachevsky.- 13. Current Challenges Facing the Academic Profession in Argentina: Tensions between Teaching and Research; [NAME] and Marquina.- 14. Teaching and Research in Malaysian Public Universities: Synergistic or Antagonistic?; Azman, [NAME], Sirat and Yunus.- 15. From Teachers to Perfect Humboldtian Persons to Academic Superpersons: The Teaching and Research Activities of the South African Academic Profession; Wolhuter.- PART IV. Teaching and [NAME] Systems.- 16. The Balance between Teaching and Research in the Work Life of American Academics; Finkelstein.- 17. Teaching and Research in English Higher Education: The Fragmentation, Diversification and Reorganization of Academic Work, 1992-2007; Locke.- 18. Teaching, Research and the Canadian Professoriate; Jones, Gopaul, Weinrib, Metcalfe, Fisher, [NAME] and Rubenson.- 19. Australian Academics, Teaching and Research: History, Vexed issues and [NAME]; Bentley, Goedegebuure and Meek.- Concluding Observations.- 20. Teaching and Research across Higher Education Systems: A Typology and Implications; [NAME] and Cummings.- 21. Teaching and Research: A Vulnerable Linkage?; Teichler and [NAME]. | This book discusses how teaching and research have been weighted differently in academia in 18 countries and one region, Hong Kong SAR, based on an international comparative study entitled the Changing Academic Profession (CAP). It addresses these issues using empirical evidence, the CAP data. Specifically, the focus is on how teaching and research are defined in each higher education system, how teaching and research are preferred and conducted by academics, and how academics are rewarded by their institution.   Since the establishment of Berlin University in 1810, there has been controversy on teaching and research as the primary functions of universities and academics. The controversy increased when Johns Hopkins University was established in 1876 with only graduate programs, and more recently with the release of the Carnegie Foundation report Scholarship Reconsidered by [NAME] in 1990. Since the publication of Scholarship Reconsidered in 1990, higher education scholars and policymakers began to pay attention to the details of teaching and research activities, a kind of ‘black box’ because only individual academics know how they conduct teaching and research in their own contexts. | <p>Focuses on how teaching and research are defined in each higher education system   </p><p>Addresses the issue of the teaching and research nexus by using comparative data   </p><p>Addresses the way academics are evaluated and rewarded by their institutions   </p><p>Discusses how recent changes in governance and management affect academics’ teaching and research activities    </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6942-7 | Education | Tong | [NAME] | Geoscience Research and [NAME] | Schools and Public Engagement | Innovations in Science Education and Technology | 21 | 1 | 2014 | 327 | Hard cover | Book | X, 327 p. 95 illus., 69 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO27000 | Science Education | JNU | SCG00002 | Earth Sciences, general | RB | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | PART I: INTRODUCTION.- 1. The context.- Geoscience and educational research in outreach activities, [NAME] Tong.- Perceptions of time matter: the importance of geoscience outreach, [NAME] II: LINKING GEOSCIENCE RESEARCH AND OUTREACH.- 2. Field-based approaches.- Engaging Alaska Communities and Students in Cryospheric Research, [NAME] and [NAME] The Salish Sea Expedition: Walking the Gangplank of Science Outreach, [NAME] and [NAME]-based learning in the field setting, [NAME] and [NAME] 3. Online approaches.- From Local to Extreme Environments (FLEXE): Connecting students and scientists in online forums, [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Kerlin.- Communicating scientific research through the web and social media: Experience of the United Nations University with the Our World 2.0 web magazine, [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] geosciences from a different perspective: 'edutainment' video clips by pupils and scientists, [NAME], [NAME] and S. Tiemann.- Small, subject-oriented educational resource gateways: what are their roles in geoscience education?.- Matteo Cattadori, Cristiana Bianchi, [NAME] and [NAME] Masiello.- 4. Workshop and laboratory-based approaches, The European experience of educational seismology, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], F. Courboulex, [NAME], [NAME], A. Sauron, [NAME], [NAME] and D. Giardini.-  [NAME]: Teaching geochronology to high school students in the US, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] meteorological workshop – an extracurricular school activity for pupils, [NAME] and Dubravka Rasol.- Grasping deep time with scaled space in personal environs, [NAME] Jacobsen.- PART III: ENHANCING THE LINK BETWEEN GEOSCIENCE RESEARCH AND OUTREACH.- 5. Programme design.-  Integrating Geoscience Research in Primary and Secondary Education, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Krisanadej Jaroensutasinee, [NAME] and Kenji Yoshikawa.- Bridging scientific research and science education in high schools through authentic and simulated science experiences, Lucette Barber.- Using guided inquiry tools with online geosciences data from the Great Lakes, Sandra Rutherford.- 6. Promoting research-enhanced outreach.- Communicating Climate Science from a Data-Centered Perspective, [NAME] Rogers.- Geoscience Outreach Education with the Local Community, [NAME] Saltzman.- Using research to promote action in Earth science professional development for teachers, [NAME]. | From energy and water resources to natural disasters, and from changing climatic patterns to the evolution of the Earth’s deep interior, geoscience research affects people’s lives in many ways and on many levels. This book offers a stimulating cross-disciplinary perspective on the important relationship between geoscience research and outreach activities for schools and for the general public.  The contributors – academics, research scientists, science educators and outreach program educators – describe and evaluate outreach programs from around the world. A section entitled Field-based Approaches includes a chapter describing an initiative to engage Alaskan communities and students in research, and another on problem-based learning in the field setting. The Online Approaches section discusses ways to connect students and scientists using online forums; use of the web and social media, including the United Nations University and its experience with the design of a web magazine featuring geoscience research; and video clips on marine geoscience created by students and scientists. The section on Workshop and Laboratory-based Approaches includes a chapter on teaching geochronology to high school students, and another describing an extracurricular school activity program on meteorology. The Program Design section presents chapters on Integrating Geoscience Research in Primary and Secondary Education, on ways to bridge research with science education at the high school level, and on use of online geoscience data from the Great Lakes. The concluding section, Promoting Research-enhanced [NAME], offers chapters on Geoscience Outreach Education with the local community by a leading research-intensive university, and on the use of research to promote action in Earth science professional development for schoolteachers.Geoscience Research and [NAME]: Schools and Public Engagement will benefit geoscience researchers who wish to promote their work beyond academia. It offers guidance to those seeking research funding from agencies, which increasingly request detailed plans for outreach activities in research proposals. Policymakers, educators and scientists working in museums, learned societies and public organizations who wish to widen participation will also find this book useful.   Together with the companion volume Geoscience Research and Education: Teaching at Universities, this book showcases the key role that geoscience research plays in a wide spectrum of educational settings. | <p>Uses examples from around the world to show how scientific research and outreach to schools and the public can be linked effectively<br>Includes wide-ranging pedagogical examples and design of outreach programs that feature the participation of research scientists and their research work<br>Presents in-depth discussion of integrating technology to achieve pedagogical goals</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6945-8 | Education | Tong | [NAME] | Geoscience Research and Education | Teaching at Universities | Innovations in Science Education and Technology | 20 | 1 | 2014 | 302 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 302 p. 34 illus., 28 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO27000 | Science Education | JNU | SCG00002 | Earth Sciences, general | RB | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | PART I: INTRODUCTION.- 1. The context.- From research-implicit to research-enhanced teaching: A geoscience perspective, [NAME] Tong.- Teaching and research in the contemporary university, [NAME] Marginson.- PART II: RESEARCH-TEACHING NEXUS IN GEOSCIENCE.- 2. Perspectives.- The challenge of combining research and teaching: A young geoscientist’s perspective, [NAME] research into teaching geosciences: the Masters student’s perspective, [NAME] Teaching on the High Seas: How Field Research Enhances Teaching at All Levels, [NAME]. Promoting research-enhanced teaching.- [NAME] and departmental strategies to link teaching and geoscience research, [NAME] Jenkins.- The Role of scholarly publication in geocognition and discipline-based geoscience education research, [NAME] Libarkin.- Geologic Displays as Science and Art, [NAME] Chan.- Teaching Geoscience Research to Adult Undergraduates and Distance Learners, Hilary Downes.- Geoscience Internships in the Oil and Gas Industry: A Winning Proposition for both Students and Employers, [NAME] and [NAME] MacGregor.- PART III: PEDAGOGICAL EXAMPLES.- 4. Use of technology.- Integration of Enquiry Fossil Research Approaches and Students’ Local Environments within Online Geoscience Classrooms, [NAME] and [NAME] Embedding Research Practice Activities into Earth and Planetary Sciences Courses Through the Use of Remotely Operable Analytical Instrumentation, [NAME] Using Interactive Virtual Field Guides and Linked Data in Geoscience Teaching and [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and Anne-Marie Nuttall.- GEOverse – An undergraduate research journal:  Research Dissemination within and beyond the [NAME], Helen Walkington.- Towards technology- and research-enhanced education (TREE): Electronic feedback as a teaching tool in geoscience, [NAME] Tong.- 5. Programme design.- Introducing university students to authentic, hands-on undergraduate geoscience research in entry-level coursework, [NAME] Guertin.- Engaging first-year students in team-oriented research: The Terrascope learning community, [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME]’ final projects: an opportunity to link research and teaching, [NAME] and [NAME] in an International and Interdisciplinary Framework: from [NAME] to [NAME] in NE Spain, D. Badía, [NAME], [NAME], F. Fillat and D. Gómez.- The Role of concept inventories in course assessment, [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME]. | Focusing on geoscience, this book applies a uniquely cross-disciplinary perspective to its examination of the relationship between scientific research and teaching at universities. Contributions show how the use of technology and innovative pedagogical design allows students at different stages of their university studies to develop skills and experience in geoscience research. The book offers wide-ranging insight from academics in geoscience, science education and higher education policy and pedagogy, as well as from students and industry experts. The opening section sets the context, with a chapter on teaching and research in the contemporary university by a world-leading academic in higher education, and an essay by the editor on the case of moving from research-implicit to research-enhanced teaching. Part Two addresses the research-teaching nexus in geoscience, offering chapters entitled The Challenge of Combining Research and Teaching: A Young Geoscientist’s Perspective; Teaching on the High Seas: How Field Research Enhances Teaching at All Levels; [NAME] and Departmental Strategies to Link Teaching and Geoscience Research; and [NAME] in the Oil and Gas Industry, among others. In Part Three, the use of technology is discussed in chapters such as Using Interactive Virtual Field Guides and Linked Data in Geoscience Teaching and Learning; and Towards Technology- and Research-enhanced Education (TREE): Electronic Feedback as a Teaching Tool in Geoscience.  The Program Design section includes chapters on Introducing University Students to Authentic, Hands-on Undergraduate Geoscience Research, and the opportunity to link research and teaching in students’ final projects and more.  Geoscience Research and Education: Teaching at Universities is a useful resource for understanding the research-teaching nexus and how it has been implemented in different types of universities and in different countries. Science academics seeking to integrate research into teaching will find the book highly relevant to their work. The emphasis on using technology as a means to link research and teaching will be of great interest and practical benefit to learning technologists, science educators and university policymakers.   Together with the companion volume Geoscience Research and [NAME]: Schools and Public Engagement, this book showcases the key role that geoscience research plays in a wide spectrum of educational settings. | Shows recent trends in the synergy between research and education Offers in-depth discussion on integrating technology to achieve pedagogical goals<br>Benefits researchers who wish to integrate their research work in teaching as well as lecturers who seek opportunities to enhance their teaching by featuring scientific research | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-38302-1 | Education | Wang | [NAME] | A New Cultural Revolution? | The Road to Privatization of Higher Education in China |  |  | 1 | 2013 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 180 p. 30 illus. | 0 | approx. | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO36000 | Higher Education | JNM | SCO19000 | Educational Policy and Politics | JNF | Education | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | Planned | 2013-07-01 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: Introduction - This chapter explains the aim and scope of the book.- Chapter 2: Higher education in China: local, national and global context - This chapter provides the background for privatization of HE in China.- Chapter 3: Privatization of higher education: theoretical underpinnings - This chapter conceptualizes privatization of HE in the Chinese context.- Chapter 4: Implementation of privatization: scale and scope - This chapter aims to answer how privatization is implemented by looking at the development of the private HE sector, and the privatization strategies adopted in publish HEIs.- Chapter 5: Financing higher education: changing rationales for funding - This chapter examines the financial aspects of HE in terms of revenue and expenditure.- Chapter 6: Control and regulation of higher education: innovated university governance - This chapter looks into the control of HE from three aspects, i.e. educational regulation, institutional autonomy and the mechanism of HE control.- Chapter 7: Rethinking privatization of higher education in China: lessons and impacts - This chapter concludes the book by evaluating the privatization of HE in China in terms of effects and problems.- References.- Appendices​. | This book makes both empirical and conceptual contributions to the debate on the privatization of Higher Education (HE) in China. Empirically, it aims to fill a gap in our knowledge of the privatization of HE in North China. To this end, I chose Beijing as a case for analysis and visited nine institutes of HE. The case study strategy is also complemented by an extensive review of national policies to reveal problems beyond the specific case of Beijing and of national concern. The effects of the cultural and socio-economic background and the unique state-party controlling system on HE management will be stressed. Conceptually, most existing studies on the privatization of HE in China adopt a policy analysis approach, while research on the privatization of other public sectors or in other countries is frequently guided by economic theories. This book thus tries to combine both social policy and econometric approaches to provide a systematic and detailed investigation of the privatization process in the context of HE. It also examines the extent to which “western” theories are applicable in the Chinese context. | <p>First book on privatization of Higher Education in North China Highlights on the unique political, economic and cultural background of China </p><p>Focus on different practices of and rationales behind the privatization of Higher Education in China </p><p>Challenge to the existing assumption on this Higher Education governance change ​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-37514-9 | Education | Wang | [NAME] | The Yuanpei Program in Peking University | A Case Study of Curriculum Innovation |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 171 | Hard cover | Book | XXI, 171 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO40000 | Literacy | CFC | [NAME] | Migration | [NAME] | Education | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1 Introduction.- Chapter 2 Theoretical Frameworks for Understanding the Innovation.- Chapter 3 The Concept of General.- Education Chapter 4 Methodology.- Chapter 5 The case of the Yuanpei program: [NAME] and contextual factors.- Chapter 6 Findings—Major conflicts, its process and sources.- Chapter 7 Conclusions and Discussion.- References.- [NAME]. | The Yuanpei program is an institution wide curriculum innovation, modeling on the core curriculum in Harvard which is committed to carrying out general education. This research investigated the major conflicts that arose in the process of initiation and implementation of the Yuanpei program, how these conflicts evolved during the process, and what were the sources of these conflicts. The conflict model, primarily derived from conflict theory, was adopted to interpret and analyze the process of curriculum innovation in this context.   The study employed a qualitative case study approach. Data were collected primarily through interviews, observations and document analysis. The administrators, teachers and students were interviewed to gain insight into major conflicts arose, their processes and sources in process of the curriculum innovation. The researcher primarily observed program practices and operations, including program setting, the human, social environment (how participants interact and communicate), and program activities and participant behaviors. The researcher distinguished between conceptual conflicts and practical conflict in light of the different stages in which conflicts emerged. The researcher mainly identified three conceptual conflicts that represent the focus of debates: first, the two opposing opinions on how to balance between general education and specialized education; second, potential incongruence in the idea of the Yuanpei program; third, conflict between the changing need of society and traditional system of training. The researcher summarized four categories of practical conflicts in light of various issues: free-course selection, free-major selection, faculty advisor as well as general education elective courses, in each of which sub-themes were identified and analyzed.   The researcher described how both conceptual and practical conflicts evolved. Each major conceptual conflict seems to go through similar stages based on the data, involving issue, confrontation and integration of claims of both sides. For practical conflicts, factors contributing to the escalation and de-escalation, moderation of conflicts were found by the researcher. The research identified different roles, incompatible values, contested resources and structural constraints as the main sources of conflict. Any conflict may involve more than one category or may be mainly due to one category.   As such, the study is exploratory and contributes to the scholarship on educational change through its analysis of the curriculum innovation for general education in Peking University. | Provide useful experience in general education curriculum innovations for Chinese educators <br>Help readers better understand the innovation process in Peking University <br>Helped identify and illuminate many salient issues that are essential to the success of general education innovations in Chinese universities | Science | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-38930-6 | Education | Wang | [NAME] | Education Policy Reform Trends in G20 Members |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 402 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 402 p. 21 illus., 19 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO00000 | Education (general) | JN |  |  |  | Education | Contributed volume | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Preface.- Part I: Education Reform Social and Political Changes.- Part II: Pushing Forward Governance Reform.- Part III: Changing Policy Paradigms.- Part IV: Changes in the Education System.- About the Contributors.- About the Editor.- About the NIES. | G20 members bring together the world’s major advanced and emerging economies, as well as the European Union. Together they represent some 90% of global GDP, 80% of global trade and two-thirds of the world’s population. In recognition of educational development as a key driver of economic development, the G20 members have put education reform high on their policy agenda in order to meet the challenges and embrace the opportunities ahead. Their experiences and lessons in education reform will not only showcase the global trend of education development, but also will provide valuable reference and inspiration for undertaking education reform to advance national development in China as well as other countries. This book documents recent policy reform in G20 members’ systems, showcases the global trends in education policy, serves as a valuable reference tool and also provide inspiration for undertaking education reform to advance development in related countries.​ | <p>The first book to summarize G20 experiences in education policy reforms responding to the global changes in 21st century</p><p>The most comprehensive document on key issues in education reform that shaped and will shape the world’s future</p><p>An authoritative analysis of the driving forces and contributing factors to success of education reforms in most parts of the world</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6670-9 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME] | Early Childhood and Neuroscience - Links to Development and Learning |  | Educating the Young Child | 7 | 1 | 2013 | 220 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 220 p. 14 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | SCO37000 | Childhood Education | [NAME] | SCY12040 | Child and School Psychology | JMC | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Available | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 | 2013-06-18 00:00:00 |  | Acknowledgements.- Preface; [NAME]; [NAME] and Debby Zambo.- 1. The Practical and Ethical Concerns of Using Neuroscience to Teach Young Children  and Help them Self-Regulate; Debby Zambo.- 2. Neuroscience: The Genesis of Our Individual Brain Strengths; [NAME] and Jena VanStelten.- 3. Reading and the Young Brain; [NAME] and [NAME] Fisher.- 4. Brain Development in Early Childhood: A Critical Analysis; [NAME] and [NAME] Alferink.- 5. Addressing the Affective Domain: What Neuroscience says about Social/Emotional Development in Early Childhood; [NAME] 6. Early Literacy Trends for Children Identified as At-Risk for School Failure: Are They Consistent with Contemporary Neuroscience and Learning Theory?; [NAME]. Brain Differences in Children with Autism and the Subsequent Impact this has on [NAME]; [NAME] Branson.- 8. The Twice Exceptional Young Learner; [NAME] Wasserman.- 9. Making a Case for Early Intervention: The Role of Developmental Neuroscience; [NAME] Stack.- 10. Effective Strategies to Help Teachers Learn about Brain Development; Billie Enz and [NAME] Stamm.- 11. Metaphors of Developmental Process for Brain-Savvy Teachers; [NAME] Remaining Optimistic, Cautious and Active; Debby Zambo and [NAME]. | Information from neuroscience is growing and being properly used, and misused wich makes it imperative that educators receive accurate and practical information. This book provides the accurate and practical information educators (pre-service and in-service) and caregivers serving children birth through age 8 need to know. This volume takes a practical and cautionary stance. It reminds educators to consider the ethical implications of neuroscience when it is applied to education, reviews current findings from neuroscience and reveals the dangers of oversimplification and inappropriate extensions of neuroscience into curricula. It brings together a group of authors with varied expertise writing on an array of inter-related educational topics that will help educators use neuroscience to understand and address the cognitive, emotional, social, and behavioral needs of all young children, including those with exceptionalities. They believe neuroscience can be insightful and useful to educators if applied ethically and with care. The book offers strategies educators and caregivers can use to affect children today and the adults they can become. | <p>Provides a greater understanding of how the brain develops, functions and learns   </p><p>Shows how the understanding of the brain can be used to educate young children </p><p>Gives insight into the importance of both heredity and the environment for young brains   </p><p>Provides specific strategies and approaches drawn from neuroscience that create effective learning environments </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-37906-2 | Law | Balouziyeh | [NAME] | A Legal Guide to United States Business Organizations | The Law of Partnerships, Corporations, and Limited Liability Companies |  |  | 2 | 2013 | 120 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 120 p. 118 illus. | 0 | final | 59.99 | 64.19 | 65.99 | 53.99 | 80 | English | Law | SCR14002 | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | LB | SCW23024 | Business Taxation/Tax Law | KFFD1 | Law | Professional book | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I: Introduction and General Principles.- Part II: The Sole proprietorship and Partnerships.- Part III: The Corporation.- Part IV: The Limited Liability Company. | This volume provides an overview of United States federal and state law governing business organizations. The chapters take the reader through a step-by-step exposition of the most basic sole proprietorships to the most complex multi-tiered conglomerates. Among the business organizations treated are partnerships with their various modalities (general partnerships, limited partnerships, limited liability partnerships), corporations (including closely held corporations, public corporations and other variations) and limited liability companies. The case law and statutes governing the full menu of business organizations are systematically analyzed and presented. Leading cases at both the federal and state level as well as model legislation such as the Uniform Partnership Act and enacted legislation are further examined. Other topics covered include Agency and partnerships, Accounting, taxation and finance, Startup corporations and venture capital, Fiduciary duties and shareholder control, Mergers and acquisitions. | <p>Provides a concise synopsis of the black letter law, summarizing leading cases rather than reproducing them for the reader to read, analyze and reconcile</p><p>An excellent companion to any business organizations casebook or compendium of primary source documents, providing a guide that helps develop the “big picture” as to how cases fit together in forming the overlying governing principles</p><p>Special insights from a lawyer with civil law and common law qualifications, who has first hand experience with practicing law on three continents and who is well-versed with American law and explaining it to foreign practitioners</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-01070-0 | Law | Diver | [NAME] | A Law of Blood-ties - The 'Right' to Access Genetic Ancestry |  |  |  | 1 | 2013 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 450 p. | 0 | approx. | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | SCR19020 | Human Rights | JPVH | [NAME] | Family | JHBK | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2013-09-17 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- The Blood-tie as [NAME]-cultural 'Item': Ancestry Feared and Revered.- The Blood-tie: 'Properly Locked Drawers' and a 'Doomed Quality'.- Conceptualizing the 'Right' to Avoid Origin Deprivation: International Law and Domestic Implementation.- Strasbourg Jurisprudence: 'Remembered Relatedness'.- Never Knowing 'One's Past': Genetic Ancestry Vetoes as Discrimination?.- 'Related' Matters in an Open Records Region: Relinquishment, Contact and Best Interests.- Blood-tie Preservation as Paramount: Best Interests of Child Outweighed?.- Guiding Principles, Hard Cases.- Conclusion: Preventing Origin Deprivation. | This text collates and examines the jurisprudence that currently exists in respect of blood-tied genetic connection, arguing that the right to identity often rests upon the ability to identify biological ancestors, which in turn requires an absence of adult-centric veto norms. It looks firstly to the nature and purpose of the blood-tie as a unique item of birthright heritage, whose socio-cultural value perhaps lies mainly in preventing, or perhaps engendering, a feared or revered sense of ‘otherness.’ It then traces the evolution of the various policies on ‘telling’ and accessing truth, tying these to the diverse body of psychological theories on the need for unbroken attachments and the harms of being origin deprived.   The ‘law’ of the blood-tie comprises of several overlapping and sometimes conflicting strands: the international law provisions and UNCRC Country Reports on the child’s right to identity, recent Strasbourg case law, and domestic case law from a number of jurisdictions on issues such as legal parentage, vetoes on post-adoption contact, court-delegated decision-making, overturned placements and the best interests of the relinquished child.  The text also suggests a means of preventing the discriminatory effects of denied ancestry, calling upon domestic jurists, legislators, policy-makers and parents to be mindful of the long-term effects of genetic ‘kinlessness’ upon origin deprived persons, especially where they have been tasked with protecting this vulnerable section of the population. | <p>Collates and analyses current law and policies on the right to genetic ancestry </p><p>Provides guidance/reference to legal and social work practitioners and to scholars/students </p><p>Of interest to adoptees, donor-gamete conceived persons and genetic relatives affectes by vetoes on information disclosure/contact​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-38901-6 | Law | Kerikmäe | [NAME] | Protecting Human Rights in the EU | Controversies and Challenges of the Charter of Fundamental Rights |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 200 | Hard cover | Book | VI, 200 p. 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | SCR19020 | Human Rights | JPVH | SCR20000 | [NAME] | LB | Law | Contributed volume | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: EU Charter as a dynamic instrument.- EU Charter: Its nature, innovative character and horizontal effect.- The Future of Universality of Rights.- The Freedom to Conduct Business and the Right to Property: The EU Technology Transfer Block Exemption Regulation and the relationship between Intellectual Property and Competition Law.- The Contribution of the European Charter of Human Rights to the Right to Legal Aid.- Gender as an Impediment of Marriage. Free Movement of Citizens and EU Charter of Fundamental Rights.- The standard of judicial review in EU competition law enforcement and its compatibility with the right to a fair trial under the EU Charter of Fundamental Rights.- European court of asylum – does it exist?.- Free movement of students in the EU.- Fundamental rights of athletes in the EU POST-LISBON.- Idolatry of Rights and Freedoms Reflections on the Autopoietic Role of Fundamental Rights within Constitutionalization of the European Union. | Human rights are much talked about and much written about, in academic legal literature as well as in political and other social sciences and the general political debate. This book argues that the universality of basic human rights is one of the values of the concept of rights. It points out the risk of a certain “inflation” caused by the current habit of talking so much and so often about human rights and of using them as a basis for claims of various kinds. These rights, their understanding and interpretation may need to become more “purist” to ensure that universal human rights as a concept survive.Another chapter concentrates on the analysis of the frames of “EU protected human rights” from the perspective of effective implementation.Further, the book not only deals with the complicated relations between the EU and international law, but also seeks to show the horizontal effect. To that end, the fears and hopes of the member states and interest groups are categorized and commented on. Lastly, the gaps in theory and practice are addressed, current trends related to implementation are pointed out, and suggestions are made concerning how to make the best out of the Charter. | <p>Systematic overview of all the rights covered by the EU Charter of Fundamental Rights </p><p>Analysis of the constitutional problems and institutional framework </p><p>Recommendations for practitioners </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-00350-4 | Law | Marten | [NAME] | Port State Jurisdiction and the Regulation of International Merchant Shipping |  | Hamburg Studies on Maritime Affairs | 26 | 1 | 2014 | 257 | Soft cover | Book | X, 257 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | [NAME] | Law of the Sea, Air and [NAME] | LBB | SCR14002 | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | LB | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Background to Port State Jurisdiction.- The Growth of Port State Jurisdiction.- Port States Taking Charge:  The United States’ Cruise Vessel Security and Safety Act 2010.- Port States Behind the Scenes:  The European Union’s 2009 Insurance Directive.- Port States and Seafarers: Australia’s Maritime Employment Legislation.- Conclusions. | This book examines the concept of port state jurisdiction in the context of international maritime law. In particular the book focuses on situations where port states have used their jurisdiction over visiting foreign-flagged vessels to apply unilateral domestic law, as compared with the internationally-agreed standards enforced by regional port state control organisations. To illustrate the legal issues involved three recent pieces of legislation are analysed in detail: the United States' Cruise Vessel Security and Safety Act 2010, the EU's liability insurance directive of 2009, and Australia's Fair Work Act 2009. Key issues include the legality of port states’ attempts to regulate aspects of a vessel’s structure or equipment, or even certain activities that may take place before a vessel’s arrival in port. The author argues that examples of unilateral measures being imposed by way of port state jurisdiction are growing, and that without active protests from flag states this concept will continue to expand in scope. As international law currently presents very few restrictions on the actions of ambitious port states, such developments may have a significant impact on the future of international maritime regulation.​ | <p>First book to focus exclusively on port state jurisdiction as a standalone concept </p><p>Detailed legal analysis drawing on a wide range of international sources </p><p>Particular relevance to government maritime administrations​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-00448-8 | Law | Oestreicher | [NAME]; [NAME] | Taxation of Income from Domestic and Cross-border Collective Investment | A Qualitative and [NAME] |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 150 | Hard cover | Book | XX, 150 p. 7 illus., 6 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | [NAME] | International Economic Law, Trade Law | LBBM | SCW23024 | Business Taxation/Tax Law | KFFD1 | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Analysis.- Country summaries. | The Fund Reporting Cloud® has made tax reporting less complex, but comparing the effective tax treatment of investment funds and their investors in an international environment is still an ambitious task. Against this background, this study examines the tax consequences at fund, asset, and investor level. In geographical terms our comparison covers eleven European countries, the USA, and Japan. Our analysis of the relevant tax provisions, which is of a primarily qualitative nature, is complemented by a quantitative comparison of the tax burden for a model investor investing assets nationally in the form of a collective investment. It will be of interest both for investors seeking tax advantages and for governments to check whether there is a need for tax reforms. It also ties in perfectly with the current evaluations at OECD level in the context of TRACE. | <p>Tax treatment of investment income including the legal framework conditions is examined in an international comparison </p><p>Distinguishes between the tax consequences to be considered at the various taxation levels (assets, collective investment, and investor) </p><p>Country summaries provide a brief description of the taxation systems, the legal bases, and taxation at fund and investor level, given in table form, ordered country by country​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-00274-3 | Law | Riccardi | [NAME] | Chinese Tax Law and International Treaties |  |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 270 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 270 p. 13 illus. | 0 | final | 79.99 | 85.59 | 87.99 | 72 | 106.5 | English | Law | SCR14002 | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | LB | SCW23024 | Business Taxation/Tax Law | KFFD1 | Law | Professional book | Springer International Publishing | Available | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 | 2013-06-12 00:00:00 |  | [NAME] and Tax Reform.- Individual Income Tax Law.- Company Income Tax.- Turnover Taxes.- Profiles of International Tax.- Introduction to International Taxation.- Transfer Pricing Policies in China.- Anti-Avoidance Rules and Permanent Establishment Concept.- International Tax Treaties. | The People’s Republic of China’s tax policies and international obligations are as multifaceted and dynamic as they are complex, developing closely with the nation’s rise to the world’s fastest-growing major economy. Today, after decades of reform and the entry into the World Trade Organization, China has developed regulatory systems that enable it to provide stable administration, including a tax structure. China’s main tax reform can be attributed to the enactment of the Enterprise Income Tax Law, which came into effect on January 1, 2008. Chinese tax regulations include direct taxes, indirect taxes, other taxes, and custom duties and from a collection point of view, China’s tax administration adopts a very devolved system, with revenue collected and shared between different levels of government in accordance with contracts between the different levels of the tax administration system. With respect to international treaties, China has established a network of bilateral tax treaties and regional free trade agreements. This publication describes in detail China’s complex tax system and policies, as well as major bilateral treaties in which China has entered into using country-by-country analysis. [NAME] is Tax Advisor and Certified Public Accountant specialized in international taxation. He is based in Shanghai, where he focuses on business and tax law, assisting foreign investments in East Asia. He is an auditor and an advisor for several corporate groups and he is partner and Head of Tax of the consulting firm GWA, specializing in emerging markets. | <p>Comprehensive and updated tax guide which will help readers to better understand the Chinese tax system. </p><p>Provides a collection of the most significant tax treaties between China and foreign countries. </p><p>Contains practical ways for tax calculation which are very easy to understand.</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-38453-0 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME] | History of Social Law in Germany |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 320 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | SCR11011 | Theories of Law, Philosophy of Law, Legal History | LAB | SCW12197 | Social Policy | KCP | Law | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Social Protection in the Middle Ages and in the Early Modern State: Alms, Poor Relief, Care, Social Help.- Social Policy in the Empire: The Insurance Solution.- The First World War.- The Weimar Republic.- The Nazi State.- The Post-War Period, the Federal Republic, and the German Democratic Republic.- Social Law as a Scientific Discipline.- Europeanization of Social Law.- Long Term Perspectives for Social Protection.- References.- Index. | The sole available comprehensive history of social law and the model of social welfare in Germany. The book explains the origins since the medieval times, but concentrates on the 19th and 20th centuries, especially on the introduction of the social insurance 1881-1889, of the expansion of the system in the Weimar Republic, under the Nazi-System and after World War II in the FRG and the GDR. The system of social welfare in Germany is one of the pillars of economic stability. | <p>Sole available history of social law in Germany</p><p>Explains a complicated system in a clear way</p><p>The legal history is embedded in the political and social history</p><p><p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-37272-8 | Law | Vormbaum | [NAME]; [NAME] | A Modern History of German Criminal Law |  |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 302 | Hard cover | Book | XXIII, 302 p. | 0 | final | 69.99 | 74.89 | 76.99 | 62.99 | 93.5 | English | Law | SCR11011 | Theories of Law, Philosophy of Law, Legal History | LAB | SCR14002 | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | LB | Law | Undergraduate textbook | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Delimiting the time period and  Methodology.- Criminal law at the beginning of the legal-historical period.- 19th century developments.- The shift from the 19th to the 20th century.- The 20th century.- Current events in criminal law.- Review and outlook. | Increasingly, international governmental networks and organisations make it necessary to master the legal principles of other jurisdictions. Since the advent of international criminal tribunals this need has fully reached criminal law. A large part of their work is based on comparative research. The legal systems which contribute most to this systemic discussion are common law and civil law, sometimes called continental law. So far this dialogue appears to have been dominated by the former. While there are many reasons for this, one stands out very clearly: Language. English has become the lingua franca of international legal research. The present book addresses this issue. [NAME] is one of the foremost German legal historians and the book's original has become a cornerstone of research into the history of German criminal law beyond doctrinal expositions; it allows a look at the system’s genesis, its ideological, political and cultural roots. In the field of comparative research, it is of the utmost importance to have an understanding of the law’s provenance, in other words its historical DNA. | <p>First book on the English-speaking market world-wide that deals in depth with the modern history of German criminal law </p><p>Written by one of the foremost German legal historians and edited by a leading scholar of comparative criminal law in the UK, especially with regard to German law </p><p>Together with the editor's books on German criminal law and procedure it provides a comprehensive introduction to German criminal justice for an Anglophone audience</p> | Students | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-38185-0 | Law | Yamamoto | [NAME]; [NAME] | Atoll Island States and International Law | Climate Change Displacement and Sovereignty |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 330 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 330 p. 48 illus., 46 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | SCR19000 | Public International Law | LBB | SC314000 | Climate Change Management and Policy | RN | Law | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: Geography, Economy and Environment of Low-lying Island States.- Chapter 2: Climate Change and its Effects on Low-lying Island States.- Chapter 3: Climate Change Negotiations and AOSIS.- Chapter 4: Low-lying Island Future Scenarios, Adaptation Strategies and their Implication under UNCLOS.- Chapter 5: Alternative Solutions to Preserve the Sovereignty of Atoll Island States.- Chapter 6: climate [NAME] in Atoll Island States.- [NAME]. | Atoll Island States exist on top of what is perceived to be one of the planet's most vulnerable ecosystems: atolls. It has been predicted that an increase in the pace of sea level rise brought about by increasing greenhouse gas concentrations in the atmosphere will cause them to disappear, forcing their inhabitants to migrate.  The present book represents a multidisciplinary legal and engineering perspective on this problem, challenging some common misconceptions regarding atolls and their vulnerability to sea-level rise. Coral islands have survived past changes in sea levels, and it is the survival of coral reefs what will be crucial for their continued existence. These islands are important for their inhabitants as they represent not only their ancestral agricultural lands and heritage, but also a source of revenue through the exploitation of the maritime areas associated with them. However, even if faced with extreme climate change, it could theoretically be possible for the richer Atoll Island States to engineer ways to prevent their main islands from disappearing, though sadly not all will have the required financial resources to do so.  As islands become progressively uninhabitable their residents will be forced to settle in foreign lands, and could become stateless if the Atoll Island State ceases to be recognized as a sovereign country. However, rather than tackling this problem by entering into lengthy negotiations over new treaties, more practical solutions, encompassing bilateral negotiations or the possibility of acquiring small new territories, should be explored. This would make it possible for Atoll Island States in the future to keep some sort of international sovereign personality, which could benefit the descendents of its present day inhabitants. | <p>Interdisciplinary legal and engineering perspective</p><p> Scenario-based approach on the possible future situation of atolls, and its implications on sovereignty and the exploitation of maritime areas </p><p>Over 50 figures and maps describing the geomorphological problems of atolls and corals </p><p>Detailed analysis of the implications to human rights</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6900-7 | Linguistics | Hendriks | [NAME] | Asymmetries between Language Production and Comprehension |  | Studies in Theoretical Psycholinguistics | 42 | 1 | 2014 | 232 | Hard cover | Book | XXII, 232 p. 31 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Linguistics | SCN00000 | Linguistics (general) | CBX |  |  |  | Linguistics | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1 Understanding and Misunderstanding .- 2 Asymmetries in Language Acquisition .- 3 The Listener’s Perspective .- 4 The Speaker’s Perspective .- 5 Symmetry and Asymmetry Across Languages .- 6 Competing Perspectives .- Appendix .- Index. | This book asserts that language is a signaling system rather than a code, based in part on such research as the finding that 5-year-old English and Dutch children use pronouns correctly in their own utterances, but often fail to interpret these forms correctly when used by someone else. Emphasizing the unique and sometimes competing demands of listener and speaker, the author examines resulting asymmetries between production and comprehension. The text offers examples of the interpretation of word order and pronouns by listeners, and word order freezing and referential choice by speakers. It is explored why the usual symmetry breaks down in children but also sometimes in adults. Gathering contemporary insights from theoretical linguistic research, psycholinguistic studies and computational modeling, Asymmetries between Language Production and Comprehension presents a unified explanation of this phenomenon.“Through a lucid, comprehensive review of acquisition studies on reference-related phenomena, Petra Hendriks builds a striking case for the pervasiveness of asymmetries in comprehension/production. In her view, listeners systematically misunderstand what they hear, and speakers systematically fail to prevent such misunderstandings. She argues that linguistic theory should take stock of current psycholinguistic and developmental evidence on optionality and ambiguity, and recognize language as a signaling system. The arguments are compelling yet controversial: grammar does not specify a one-to-one correspondence between form and meaning; and the demands of the mapping task differ for listeners and speakers. Her proposal is formalized within optimality theory, but researchers working outside this framework will still find it of great interest. In the language-as-code vs. language-as-signal debate, Hendriks puts the ball firmly in the other court.” Ana Pérez-Leroux, University of Toronto, Canada | <p>Offers the first unified explanation of several asymmetries between language production and language comprehension</p><p>Asserts that grammar is shaped by the competition between the speaker’s perspective and the hearer’s perspective </p><p>Combines insights in theoretical linguistics, psycholinguistics and computational modeling on the organization, use and acquisition of language</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-38435-6 | Linguistics | [NAME] | [NAME] | Error Correction in the Foreign Language Classroom | Reconsidering the Issues | Second Language Learning and Teaching |  | 1 | 2014 | 222 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 222 p. 9 illus., 6 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Linguistics | SCN13000 | Applied Linguistics | CB | SCO23000 | Language Education | CJ | Linguistics | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Error Correction as an option in form-focused instruction.- Perspectives on error correction.- Pedagogical choices in error correction.- Research on error correction. | The book aims to dispel some of the myths surrounding the place of oral and written error correction in language education by providing an exhaustive and up-to-date account of issues involved in this area, taking the stance that the provision of corrective feedback constitutes an integral part of form-focused instruction. This account places an equal emphasis on the relevant theoretical claims, the most recent research findings and everyday pedagogical concerns, particularly as they apply to the teaching of additional languages in the foreign language setting. The book will be of relevance and significance not only to specialists in the field of second language acquisition, but also to graduate and doctoral students carrying out research in the area of form-focused instruction and error correction. Many parts of the volume will also be of considerable interest and utility to teachers of foreign languages at different educational levels. | <p>Places corrective feedback firmly within the framework of form-focused instruction </p><p>Provides a detailed account of issues involved in both oral and written error correction</p><p>Contains a thorough overview of research findings into the effects of oral and written correction</p><p>Uses theoretical positions and research findings to provide concrete and feasible guidelines for classroom practice</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-00418-1 | Linguistics | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME]; Piotr Stalmaszczyk | [NAME], Discourse and Communication | Studies in Honour of Jan Majer | Second Language Learning and Teaching |  | 1 | 2014 | 170 | Hard cover | Book | 170 p. | 0 | approx. | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Linguistics | SCN13000 | Applied Linguistics | CB | SCO23000 | Language Education | CJ | Linguistics | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2013-08-17 00:00:00 |  |  | From the Contents: Analyzing spoken language for complexity, accuracy and fluency: some methodological considerations.- On Applying Simultaneous Introspection in Researching Language Acquisition.- Takes Two to Tango: Research into accent, comprehensibility and intelligibility and the implications for [NAME]: Cultural Representation in English Language Teaching (ELT) Coursebooks. | This volume brings together papers on a wide spectrum of topics within the broad area of language acquisition, stressing the interconnections between applied and theoretical linguistics, as well as language research methodology. These contributions in honor of Professor Jan Majer have been grouped in two sections: language learning, and discourse and communication. The former discusses issues varying from aspects of first, second, and third language acquisition, individual learner differences (i.e. gender, attitudes, learning strategies), and second language research methodology to the analysis of features of learner spoken language, the role of feedback in foreign language instruction, and the position of culture in EFL textbooks. The second part of the volume offers a theoretical counterbalance to the applied nature of the first one. Here, the contributions touch upon spoken and written language analysis, language awareness, and aspects of the English language; also, selected issues of language philosophy are discussed. The wide range of topics covered in the publication, authored by specialists in their respective areas, reflects Professor Majer’s academic interests and corresponds to the complex nature of the general field the volume aims to portray. | <p>Offers multiple perspectives on research conducted within the field of applied linguistics</p><p>The contributions explore practical implications for foreign language education</p><p>The studies discussed provide important guidelines for researchers interested in conducting similar research</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-00460-0 | Linguistics | Łyda | [NAME]; [NAME] | Awareness in Action | The Role of Consciousness in Language Acquisition | Second Language Learning and Teaching |  | 1 | 2013 | 261 | Hard cover | Book | XVII, 261 p. 29 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Linguistics | SCN13000 | Applied Linguistics | CB | SCO23000 | Language Education | CJ | Linguistics | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Teaching.- Learning.- Culture. | The papers included in the volume look at how language awareness affects the outcomes of foreign and second language acquisition in advanced learners. The book focuses on questions such as how much linguistic knowledge is open to the learner’s conscious experience, what should and should not be considered the knowledge of language, how language awareness can be enhanced in the classroom, and, most crucially, what effects language awareness has on attained proficiency. Some papers in the volume also address methodological challenges of researching language awareness, such as the difficulty of defining and measuring awareness with sufficient precision. | <p>Studies featured in the volume analyze awareness in advanced learners</p><p>Most subjects are university students - proficient users of English and learners of other languages, but above all adults capable of mastering technical details about the structure of the language system</p><p>Contributions to the volume present results from studies conducted in various countries, including Australia, Hong Kong, Poland and Portugal</p><p>The volume features internationally recognized authors</p><p>Previous ICFSLA proceedings volumes published through Multilingual Matters were favorably received</p><p>The main theme, language awareness is a key issue in EU language policy, and as such it may attract a wide readership amongst academics and researchers applying for grants</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6533-7 | Philosophy | Aberdein | [NAME]; [NAME] | The Argument of Mathematics |  | Logic, Epistemology, and the Unity of Science | 30 | 1 | 2013 | 393 | Hard cover | Book | X, 393 p. 65 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE16000 | Logic | HPL | SCM24005 | Mathematical Logic and Foundations | PBC | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Part I. What are Mathematical Arguments?.- Chapter 1. Non-Deductive Logic in Mathematics: The Probability of Conjectures; [NAME] Franklin.- Chapter 2. Arguments, Proofs, and Dialogues; [NAME] Chapter 3. Argumentation in Mathematics; Jesús Alcolea Banegas.- Chapter 4. Arguing Around Mathematical Proofs; [NAME] Dufour.- Part II. Argumentation as a Methodology for Studying Mathematical Practice.- Chapter 5. An Argumentative Approach to Ideal Elements in Mathematics; Paola Cantù.- Chapter 6. How Persuaded Are You? A Typology of Responses; [NAME] and [NAME] Chapter 7. [NAME] of Argumentations in Classroom Proving Processes; [NAME] and [NAME] 8. Checking Proofs; [NAME] and Reinhard Kahle.- Part III. Mathematics as a Testbed for Argumentation Theory.- Chapter 9. Dividing by Zero—and Other Mathematical Fallacies; [NAME] 10. [NAME] in Mathematical Proofs; [NAME]. 11 Analogical Arguments in Mathematics; [NAME] 12. What Philosophy of Mathematical Practice Can Teach Argumentation Theory about Diagrams and Pictures; [NAME] Larvor.- Part IV. An Argumentational Turn in the Philosophy of Mathematics.- Chapter 13. Mathematics as the Art of Abstraction; [NAME] Epstein.- Chapter 14. Towards a Theory of Mathematical Argument; [NAME] 15. Bridging the Gap Between Argumentation Theory and the Philosophy of Mathematics; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 16. Mathematical Arguments and Distributed Knowledge; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 17. The Parallel Structure of Mathematical Reasoning; [NAME] Aberdein.- Index. ​ | Written by experts in the field, this volume presents a comprehensive investigation into the relationship between argumentation theory and the philosophy of mathematical practice. Argumentation theory studies reasoning and argument, and especially those aspects not addressed, or not addressed well, by formal deduction. The philosophy of mathematical practice diverges from mainstream philosophy of mathematics in the emphasis it places on what the majority of working mathematicians actually do, rather than on mathematical foundations.The book begins by first challenging the assumption that there is no role for informal logic in mathematics. Next, it details the usefulness of argumentation theory in the understanding of mathematical practice, offering an impressively diverse set of examples, covering the history of mathematics, mathematics education and, perhaps surprisingly, formal proof verification. From there, the book demonstrates that mathematics also offers a valuable testbed for argumentation theory. Coverage concludes by defending attention to mathematical argumentation as the basis for new perspectives on the philosophy of mathematics.  ​ | <p>Investigates the relationship between argumentation theory and the philosophy of mathematical practice.   </p><p>Challenges the assumption that there is no role for informal logic in mathematics   </p><p>Offers large array of examples ranging from the history of mathematics to formal proof verification ​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6614-3 | Philosophy | Bailey | [NAME]; [NAME] | Hume's Critique of Religion: 'Sick Men's Dreams' |  | The New Synthese Historical Library | 72 | 1 | 2014 | 262 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 262 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE33000 | Philosophy of Religion | HRAB | SCE13000 | Epistemology | HPK | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. Hume the Infidel.- Chapter 2. Blasphemy, Dissimulation, and Humean Prudence.- Chapter 3. Hume's Writings on Religion.- Chapter 4. Hume on the Intelligibility of Religious Discourse.- Chapter 5. Epistemological Scepticism and Religious Belief.- Chapter 6. That Simple and Sublime Argument.- Chapter 7. The Design Argument and Empirical Evidence of God's Existence.- Chapter 8. The Problem of Evil.- Chapter 9. Miracles.- Chapter 10. The Natural History of Religion.- Chapter 11. Morality.- Chapter 12. History and the Evaluation of Religion.- Chapter 13. Was Hume an Atheist?. | In this volume, authors [NAME] and [NAME] examine the full import of [NAME] arguments and the context of the society in which his work came to fruition. They analyze the nuanced natured of Hume's philosophical discourse and provide an informed look into his position on the possible content and rational justification of religious belief.The authors first detail the pressures and forms of repression that confronted any 18th century thinker wishing to challenge publicly the truth of Christian theism.  From there, they offer an overview of Hume's writings on religion, paying particular attention to the inter-relationships between the various works. They show that Hume's writings on religion are best seen as an artfully constructed web of irreligious argument that seeks to push forward a radical outlook, one that only emerges when the attention shifts from the individual sections of the web to its overall structure and context. Even though there is no explicit denial in any of Hume's published writings or private correspondence of the existence of God, the implications of his arguments often seem to point strongly towards atheism.[NAME] was one of the leading British critics of Christianity and all forms of religion at a time when public utterances or published writings denying the truth of Christianity were liable to legal prosecution. His philosophical and historical writings offer a sustained and remarkably open critique of religion that is unmatched by any previous author writing in English.  Yet, despite Hume’s widespread reputation amongst his contemporaries for extreme irreligion, the subtle and measured manner in which he presents his position means that it remains far from clear how radical his views actually were. | <p>Offers a distinctive interpretation of [NAME], a figure of considerable interest to today’s general educated public  </p><p> </p><p>Features an overview of Hume's writings on religion as well as detailed analysis of his relevant texts</p><p> </p><p>Carefully examines the inter-relationships between Hume's various works that discuss religion</p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7066-9 | Philosophy | Barker | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Entangled Life | Organism and Environment in the Biological and Social Sciences | History, Philosophy and Theory of the Life Sciences | 4 | 1 | 2014 | 240 | Hard cover | Book | XIII, 240 p. 15 illus., 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE24000 | Philosophy of Biology | HP | SCL21001 | Evolutionary Biology | PSAJ | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: Perspectives on Entangled Life; [NAME], [NAME], and [NAME] Pearce.- Part I. Historical Perspectives.- The Origins and Development of the Idea of Organism-Environment Interaction; [NAME] Pearce.- [NAME], the Baldwin Effect, Organic Selection, and the American “Immigrant Crisis” at the Turn of the Twentieth Century; [NAME] The Tension between the Psychological and Ecological Sciences: Making Psychology More Ecological; [NAME] on Organism-Environment Interaction in Anthropology; [NAME]. Contested Models.- Adaptation, Adaptation to, and Interactive Causes; Bruce Glymour.- Environmental Grain, Organism Fitness, and Type Fitness; Marshall Abrams.- Models in Context: Biological and Epistemological Niches; [NAME] Thinking Outside the Mouse: Organism-Environment Interaction and Human Immunology; [NAME], [NAME], and [NAME]. Emerging Frameworks.- Integrating Ecology and Evolution: Niche Construction and Ecological Engineering; [NAME] and [NAME] The Affordance Landscape: The Spatial Metaphors of Evolution; [NAME] Rethinking Behavioral Evolution; [NAME]. Constructing the Cooperative Niche; [NAME]. | This volume explores the interactions between organisms and their environments and how this “entanglement” is a fundamental aspect of all life. It brings together the work and ideas of historians, philosophers, biologists, and social scientists, uniting a range of new perspectives, methods, and frameworks for examining and understanding the ways that organisms and environments interact.The volume is organized into three main sections: historical perspectives, contested models, and emerging frameworks. The first section explores the origins of the modern idea of organism-environment interaction in the mid-nineteenth century and its development by later psychologists and anthropologists. In the second section, a variety of controversial models—from mathematical representations of evolution to model organisms in medical research—are discussed and reframed in light of recent questions about the interplay between organisms and environment. The third section investigates several new ideas that have the potential to reshape key aspects of the biological and social sciences. Populations of organisms evolve in response to changing environments; bodies and minds depend on a wide array of circumstances for their development; cultures create complex relationships with the natural world even as they alter it irrevocably. The chapters in this volume share a commitment to unraveling the mysteries of this entangled life. | <p>Integrates discussions in biology and social sciences about the relation between organism and environment </p><p>Investigates the historical development of discussions of organism-environment interaction </p><p>Provides historical and  philosophical analyses of the organism-environment relationship with consequences for scientific research on this topic​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-2453-2 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME]; Szu-[NAME]; [NAME] | Mechanism and Causality in Biology and Economics |  | History, Philosophy and Theory of the Life Sciences | 3 | 1 | 2013 | 256 | Hard cover | Book | X, 256 p. 26 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE24000 | Philosophy of Biology | HP | SCW12210 | Methodology and the History of Economic Thought | KCA | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Acknowledgements.- Chapter 1. Towards the Methodological Turn in the Philosophy of Science; [NAME], Szu-[NAME], and [NAME] Millstein.- Part 1. Defining Mechanism and Causality.- Chapter 2. Mechanisms versus Causes in Biology and Medicine ; Lindley Darden.- Chapter 3. Identity, Structure, and Causal Representation in Scientific Models; [NAME] Hoover.- Part 2. Models and Representation.- Chapter 4. The Regrettable Lost of Mathematical Molding in Econometrics; Marcel Boumans.- Chapter 5. Models of Mechanisms: The Case of the Replicator Dynamics; [NAME]-Yanoff.- Chapter 6. Experimental Discovery, Data Model, and Mechanisms in Biology: An Example from Mendel’s Work; [NAME] Chen.- Part 3. Reconsidering Biological Mechanisms and Causality.- Chapter 7. Mechanisms and Laws: Clarifying the Debate; [NAME] and [NAME] Chapter 8. Natural Selection and Causal Productivity: A Reply to Glennan; [NAME] Millstein.- Chapter 9. Is Natural Selection a Population-Level Causal Process?; [NAME] Wang.- Part 4. Across Boundaries between Biology and Economics.- Chapter 10. Mechanisms and Extrapolation in the Abortion-Crime Controversy; [NAME] Steel.- Chapter 11. Causality, Impartiality and Evidence-Based Policy; [NAME] and Julian Reiss.- Chapter 12. Explaining the Explanations of 100 Million Missing Women; [NAME] and Szu-[NAME].Models of Mechanisms: The Case of the Replicator Dynamics; [NAME]-Yanoff.- Chapter 6. Experimental Discovery, Data Model, and Mechanisms in Biology: An Example from Mendel’s Work; [NAME] Chen.- Part 3. Reconsidering Biological Mechanisms and Causality.- Chapter 7. Mechanisms and Laws: Clarifying the Debate; [NAME] and [NAME] Chapter 8. Natural Selection and Causal Productivity: A Reply to Glennan; [NAME] Millstein.- Chapter 9. Is Natural Selection a Population-Level Causal Process?; [NAME] Wang.- Part 4. Across Boundaries between Biology and Economics.- Chapter 10. Mechanisms and Extrapolation in the Abortion-Crime Controversy; [NAME] Steel.- Chapter 11. Causality, Impartiality and Evidence-Based Policy; [NAME] and Julian Reiss.- Chapter 12. Explaining the Explanations of 100 Million Missing Women; [NAME] and Szu-[NAME]. | This volume addresses fundamental issues in the philosophy of science in the context of two most intriguing fields: biology and economics. Written by authorities and experts in the philosophy of biology and economics, Mechanism and Causality in Biology and Economics provides a structured study of the concepts of mechanism and causality in these disciplines and draws careful juxtapositions between philosophical apparatus and scientific practice. By exploring the issues that are most salient to the contemporary philosophies of biology and economics and by presenting comparative analyses, the book serves as a platform not only for gaining mutual understanding between scientists and philosophers of the life sciences and those of the social sciences, but also for sharing interdisciplinary research that combines both philosophical concepts in both fields.The book begins by defining the concepts of mechanism and causality in biology and economics, respectively. The second and third parts investigate philosophical perspectives of various causal and mechanistic issues in scientific practice in the two fields. These two sections include chapters on causal issues in the theory of evolution; experiments and scientific discovery; representation of causal relations and mechanism by models in economics. The concluding section presents interdisciplinary studies of various topics concerning extrapolation of life sciences and social sciences, including chapters on the philosophical investigation of conjoining biological and economic analyses with, respectively, demography, medicine and sociology. | <p>One of the first books to examine the relationships between philosophy, biology and economics</p><p>Offers a comprehensive review of causal and mechanistic issues in biology and economics</p><p>Discusses the philosophical investigation of conjoining biological and economic analyses with demography, medicine and sociology </p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6894-9 | Philosophy | Fløistad | Guttorm Fløistad | Ethics or Moral Philosophy |  | Contemporary Philosophy: A New Survey | 11 | 1 | 2014 | 232 | Hard cover | Book | X, 232 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE14000 | Ethics | HPQ | SCX18010 | Political Theory | JPA | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.-Introduction; Guttorm Fløistad.- Éthique et mutualité. Le Care, l’indifférence et la relation fiduciaire ; [NAME] Bidima.- The Immanent and the Transcenden in Indian Ethics; Bhuvan Chandel.- Naturalism in Indian Ethics: Sāmkhya, Jainism And Buddhism; D. P. Chattopadhyaya.- Traditional Values in the Time of Globalization; Marietta Stepanyants.- What Ought I not to Do?; [NAME] Communicative Source of Moral Normativity of Moral Normativity; Ruben Apressyan.- Approaches to Ethics, Approaches in Ethics and the Idea of a “Universal Ethics”; [NAME] to Listen or Why Morality Calls for Liberal Politics; [NAME] The Human Sciences and Moral Judgment; [NAME] after [NAME] in Japan; Noriko Hashimoto.- Values That Work. A Practical Approach to Value-Based Management in Private and Public Organizations; Tor Dahl.- Architectural Ethics:A Phenomenological Prespective; Beata Sirowy.- Médecine et philosophie morale (1990-2010) ; Valérie Gateau & Anne Fagot-Largeault.- Index. ​ | This volume examines a variety of philosophical approaches that seek to formulate practical guidelines or norms for human actions and behavior in different areas of society, including politics, cultural traditions, the environment, business management, architecture, and medicine.   Written by a team of international authors, this volume features thirteen surveys. It begins with an exploration of ethics in politics and cultural traditions. From genocide to the unequal distribution of wealth, it examines many of the harms that currently affect societies throughout the world and considers a way that those in politics can follow to provide better care for all their populations. Next, the book looks at the relation between ethics and cultural traditions. It features a paper that examines the tension that often exists between the past and the present, with a special focus on the history of India. This volume also considers the idea of a universal system of ethics, presents a practical approach to value-based management in private and public organizations, and examines ethics in medicine.   In addition, this volume includes coverage of a new type of ethics called Eco-ethica, proposed by the Japanese philosopher Tomonobu Imamichi, which seeks to answer the question of how men and women can “live better” or “live together with each other” in a systematized, technological age.   ​ | <p>Considers the idea of a universal system of ethics   </p><p>Includes coverage of a new type of ethics called Eco-ethica   </p><p>Scrutinizes the relationship between ethics and cultural tradition​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-00800-4 | Philosophy | Franssen | Maarten Franssen; [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Artefact Kinds | Ontology and the Human-Made World | Synthese Library | 365 | 1 | 2014 | 230 | Hard cover | Book | X, 230 p. 3 illus., 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE35000 | Philosophy of Technology | HP | SCT17020 | Engineering Design | TBD | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. Introduction: The Ontology of Technical Artefacts; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] I: Artefact Kinds and Metaphysics.- Chapter 2. How Real are Artefacts and Artefact Kinds?; [NAME]. Artifacts and Mind-Independence; [NAME] 4. Public Artifacts, Intentions, and Norms; [NAME] Thomasson.- Chapter 5. Artefact Kinds, Ontological Criteria and Forms of Mind-Dependence; [NAME] and [NAME] 6. Artifact Kinds, Identity Criteria and Logical Adequacy; [NAME], [NAME] and Marzia Soavi.- Part II: Artefact Kinds and New Perspectives.- Chapter 7. Creating Artifactual Kinds; [NAME] and Diego Lawler.- Chapter 8. Metaphysical and Epistemological Approaches to Developing a Theory of Artifact Kinds; [NAME] Chapter 9. Ethnotechnology: A Manifesto; [NAME] Preston.- Part III: Artefact Kinds and Engineering Practice.- Chapter 10. On What is Made: Instruments, Products and Natural Kinds of Artefacts; [NAME] and [NAME] 11. Artefactual Systems, Missing Components and Replaceability; Nicola Guarino.- Chapter 12. Engineering Differences Between Natural, Social and Artificial Kinds; [NAME] Kerr.​ | This book is concerned with two intimately related topics of metaphysics: the identity of entities and the foundations of classification. What it adds to previous discussions of these topics is that it addresses them with respect to human-made entities, that is, artefacts. As the chapters in the book show, questions of identity and classification require other treatments and lead to other answers for artefacts than for natural entities. These answers are of interest to philosophers not only for their clarification of artefacts as a category of things but also for the new light they may shed on these issue with respect to to natural entities.     This volume is structured in three parts.  The contributions in Part I address basic ontological and metaphysical questions in relation to artefact kinds: How should we conceive of artefact kinds? Are they real kinds? How are identity conditions for artefacts and artefact kinds related? The contributions in Part II address meta-ontological questions: What, exactly, should an ontological account of artefact kinds provide us with? What scope can it aim for? Which ways of approaching the ontology of artefact kinds are there, how promising are they, and how should we assess this? In Part III, the essays offer engineering practice rather than theoretical philosophy as a point of reference. The issues addressed here include: How do engineers classify technical artefacts and on what grounds? What makes specific classes of technical artefacts candidates for ontologically real kinds, and by which criteria?​ | <p>Addresses ontologies of artefact kinds in engineering practice   </p><p>Offers practical as well as theoretical implications   </p><p>Presents important developments in both formal ontology and ontology engineering​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7057-7 | Philosophy | Friend | [NAME] | Pluralism in Mathematics: A New Position in Philosophy of Mathematics |  | Logic, Epistemology, and the Unity of Science | 32 | 1 | 2014 | 276 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 276 p. 8 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE34000 | Philosophy of Science | PDA | SCM24005 | Mathematical Logic and Foundations | PBC | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Part [NAME] the Pluralist Position from Familiar Positions.- Chapter 1. Introduction. The Journey from Realism to Pluralism.- Chapter 2. Motivating Pluralism. Starting from Maddy’s Naturalism.- Chapter 3. From Structuralism to Pluralism.- Chapter 4. Formalism and [NAME]written with [NAME] Pedeferri.- Part II. Initial Presentation of Pluralism.- Chapter 5. Philosophical Presentation of Pluralism.- Chapter 6. Using a Formal Theory of Logic Metaphorically.- Chapter 7. [NAME] in [NAME]written with [NAME] Pedeferri.- Chapter 8. Mathematical Fixtures.- Part III. Transcendental Presentation of Pluralism.- Chapter 9. The Paradoxes of Tolerance and the Transcendental Paradoxes.- Chapter 10. Pluralism Towards Pluralism.- Part IV. Putting Pluralism to Work. Applications.- Chapter 11. A Pluralist Approach to Proof in Mathematics.- Chapter 12. Pluralism and Together-Inconsistent Philosophies of Mathematics.- Chapter 13. Suggestions for Further Pluralist Enquiry.- Conclusion.​ | This book is about philosophy, mathematics and logic, giving a philosophical account of Pluralism which is a family of positions in the philosophy of mathematics. There are four parts to this book, beginning with a look at motivations for Pluralism by way of Realism, Maddy’s Naturalism, Shapiro’s Structuralism and Formalism. In the second part of this book the author covers: the philosophical presentation of Pluralism; using a formal theory of logic metaphorically; rigour and proof for the Pluralist; and mathematical fixtures. In the third part the author goes on to focus on the transcendental presentation of Pluralism, and in part four looks at applications of Pluralism, such as a Pluralist approach to proof in mathematics and how Pluralism works in regard to together-inconsistent philosophies of mathematics. The book finishes with suggestions for further Pluralist enquiry.In this work the author takes a deeply radical approach in developing a new position that will either convert readers, or act as a strong warning to treat the word ‘pluralism’ with care. | <p>Offers a radical approach, developing a position on Pluralism</p><p>Provides a cross disciplinary approach, drawing upon mathematical positions whilst presenting a philosophical account</p><p>Scrutinizes the transcendental presentation of Pluralism</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4020-6816-4 | Philosophy | Gordijn | [NAME]; [NAME] | In Pursuit of Nanoethics |  | The International Library of Ethics, Law and Technology | 10 | 1 | 2014 | 220 | Hard cover | Book | VIII, 220 p. | 0 | final | 93 | 99.51 | 102.3 | 84.5 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE14000 | Ethics | HPQ | [NAME] | Law, general | L | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: Conceptions of Nanoethics; Part I: Nanotechnology, Innovation and Industry.1: Intellectual Property Issues in Nanotechnology;2: Commercialisation and global access to nanotechnology;3: Nanotechnology and the Biotech Market;Part II: Nanotechnology and Society.4: Risk perceptions in NanoTechnology;5: Communicating Nanotechnology;6: Nanotechnology as the new GMO?;Part III: Nanotechnology and Health. 7: The case for NanoMedicine ;8: The perils of NanoMedicine; 9: Nanotechnology & Genomics; Part IV: Nanotechnology and the Environment.10: The environmental impact of nanotechnology;11: Nanotechnology as a tool against pollution;12: [NAME] and Biodiversity;Part V: Nanotechnology and Security.13: [NAME] and Surveillance;14: [NAME] and Terrorism;15: Nanotechnology and the Battlefield;Part VI: The Governance of Nanotechnology.16: Nanotechnology & Global Health; 17: Nanotechnology & World Development; 18: Nanotechnology and Converging Technologies; Outlook. Towards a nano-future?; | This volume assembles an interdisciplinary team of leading academics, industry figures, policymakers and NGO’s to consider the legal, ethical and social issues that are raised by innovations in nanoscience and nanotechnology. By bringing together international experts from a diverse range of fields this volume addresses the implications and impact that nanotechnology has on society. Through the exploration of six key themes the contributors analyse both the impact of nanotechnology and the emergence of the concept of nanoethics. Each section includes authors from both sides of the political and scientific divide – incorporating both positive and negative perspectives on nanotechnology, as well as including discussions of associated concepts such as converging technologies. The result provides for the widest and most balanced discussion of these issues to date. | <UL> <LI>Global governance focus (including authors from a number of global organisations)</LI> <P> <LI>Exploration of the nanotechnology-biotechnology convergence</LI> <P></P> <P> <LI>Transatlantic perspective (deliberate inclusion of global perspectives from US, Europe and developing world).</LI> <P></P> <P> <LI>Interdisciplinary approach to issues drawing on authors from across the natural sciences and social sciences</LI> <P></P> <P> <LI>Balanced framing of nanoethics as an emerging discipline associated with, but distinct from other branches of applied ethics</LI> <P></P></UL> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6972-4 | Philosophy | Ibekwe-SanJuan | Fidelia Ibekwe-SanJuan; [NAME] | Theories of Information, Communication and Knowledge | A Multidisciplinary Approach | Studies in History and Philosophy of Science | 34 | 1 | 2014 | 320 | Hard cover | Book | X, 320 p. 44 illus., 19 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE13000 | Epistemology | HPK | SCE34000 | Philosophy of Science | PDA | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction; [NAME] and [NAME] 1: Cybersemiotics: A new foundation for transdisciplinary theory of information, cognition, meaning, communication and consciousness; Søren Brier.- Chapter 2: Epistemology and the Study of Social Information within the Perspective of a Unified Theory of Information;Wolfgang Hofkirchner.- Chapter 3: Perception and Testimony as Data Providers; [NAME] Floridi.- Chapter 4: Human communication from the semiotic perspective; Winfried Nöth.-   Chapter 5: Mind the gap: transitions between concepts of information in varied domains; [NAME] and [NAME] Bawden.- Chapter 6:  Information and the disciplines: A conceptual meta-analysis; Jonathan Furner.- Chapter 7: Epistemological Challenges for Information Science; [NAME] 8: The nature of information science and its core concepts; [NAME] 9: Sylvie Leleu-Merviel. Coalescence in the informational process. Application to visual sense-making. Chapter 10: Understanding users’ informational constructs through the affordances of cinematographic images; [NAME] Labour.- Chapter 11: Documentary Languages and the Demarcation of Information Units in Textual Information: A Case Study; [NAME]. | This book addresses some of the key questions that scientists have been asking themselves for centuries: what is knowledge? What is information? How do we know that we know something? How do we construct meaning from the perceptions of things? Although no consensus exists on a common definition of the concepts of information and communication, few can reject the hypothesis that information – whether perceived as « object » or as « process » - is a pre-condition for knowledge. Epistemology is the study of how we know things (anglophone meaning) or the study of how scientific knowledge is arrived at and validated (francophone conception). To adopt an epistemological stance is to commit oneself to render an account of what constitutes knowledge or in procedural terms, to render an account of when one can claim to know something. An epistemological theory imposes constraints on the interpretation of human cognitive interaction with the world. It goes without saying that different epistemological theories will have more or less restrictive criteria to distinguish what constitutes knowledge from what is not. If information is a pre-condition for knowledge acquisition, giving an account of how knowledge is acquired should impact our comprehension of information and communication as concepts. While a lot has been written on the definition of these concepts, less research has attempted to establish explicit links between differing theoretical conceptions of these concepts and the underlying epistemological stances. This is what this volume attempts to do. It offers a multidisciplinary exploration of information and communication as perceived in different disciplines and how those perceptions affect theories of knowledge. | <p>Addresses a multidisciplinary approach to theories of information and knowledge </p><p>Discusses one of the most important topics for the development of the global knowledge society </p><p>Provides contributions by renowned authors​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6966-3 | Philosophy | Knuuttila | Simo Knuuttila; [NAME] | Sourcebook for the History of the Philosophy of Mind | Philosophical Psychology from Plato to [NAME] | Studies in the History of Philosophy of Mind | 12 | 1 | 2014 | 635 | Hard cover | Book | X, 635 p. | 0 | final | 249 | 266.43 | 273.9 | 224.5 | 331.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE31000 | Philosophy of Mind | [NAME] | SCE17000 | [NAME] | HPCB | Philosophy | Reference work | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- I Soul as an entity.- 1. The soul and the mind in ancient philosophy ([NAME] and [NAME]. The soul and the mind in medieval and early modern theories (Henrik Lagerlund).- II Sense perception.- 1. Ancient theories (Miira Tuominen).- 2. Medieval theories (Simo Knuuttila & Pekka Kärkkäinen).- 3. Early modern theories (Tuomo Aho).- III Common sense, fantasy, and estimation.- 1. Common sense and fantasy in ancient philosophy (Miira Tuominen).- 2. Medieval theories of internal senses (Simo Knuuttila & Pekka Kärkkäinen).- 3. Renaissance theories of internal senses ([NAME] 4. Common sense and fantasy in the seventeenth and eighteenth century [NAME]. Ancient theories (Mika Perälä).- 2. Medieval theories ([NAME] Kärkkäinen).- 3. Early Modern theories (Tuomo Aho).- V Memory and recollection.- 1. Ancient and medieval theories ([NAME] Bloch).- 2. Early modern theories (Tuomo Aho).- VI Intellection and concept formation.- 1. Ancient views of intellection (Miira Tuominen).- 2. Concepts and concept formation in medieval philosophy (Toivo Holopainen).- 3. Concepts and concept formation in early modern philosophy ([NAME] and reasoning.- 1. Ancient theories of judgement (Mika Perälä).- 2. Ancient theories of reasoning (Miira Tuominen).- 3. Medieval theories of judgement and reasoning (Mika Perälä).- 4. Early modern theories of judgement and reasoning (Tuomo Aho).- VIII Psychology of Language.- 1. Ancient and early medieval theories (Mika Perälä).- 2. Mental words and mental language in the later Middle Ages ([NAME] and [NAME]. Early Modern theories.- IX Self-Consciousness.- 1. Ancient theories (Pauliina Remes).- 2. Medieval theories (Mikko Yrjönsuuri and [NAME]. Early modern theories ([NAME] 1. From [NAME] to the Renaissance (Simo Knuuttila).- 2. Seventeenth- and eighteenth-century theories ([NAME] and choice.- 1. Choice and practical rreasoning in ancient philosophy ([NAME]. Will and choice in medieval thought ([NAME]. Will and freedom in Renaissance and Reformation thought (Risto Saarinen).- 4. Will in early modern philosophy (Mikko Yrjönsuuri).- XII Mental disturbances.- Ancient theories (Marke Ahonen).- Medieval theories (Vesa Hirvonen).- Early modern theories ([NAME] XIII Physiognomy.- Ancient, medieval and early modern physiognomy ([NAME] of gender.- Ancient theories (Malin Grahn).- Medieval theories (Ilse Paakkinen).- Early modern theories (Martina [NAME]. ​ | Fresh translations of key texts, exhaustive coverage from Plato to [NAME], and detailed commentary by expert scholars of philosophy add up to make this sourcebook the first and most comprehensive account of the history of the philosophy of mind. Published at a time when the philosophy of mind and philosophical psychology are high-profile domains in current research, the volume will inform our understanding of philosophical questions by shedding light on the origins of core conceptual assumptions often arrived at before the instauration of psychology as a recognized subject in its own right.   The chapters closely follow historical developments in our understanding of the mind, with sections dedicated to ancient, medieval Latin and Arabic, and early modern periods of development. The volume’s structural clarity enables readers to trace the entire progression of philosophical understanding on specific topics related to the mind, such as the nature of perception. Doing so reveals the fascinating contrasts between current and historical approaches. In addition to its all-inclusive source material, the volume provides subtle expert commentary that includes critical introductions to each thematic section as well as detailed engagement with the central texts. A voluminous bibliography includes hundreds of primary and secondary sources. The sheer scale of this new publication sheds light on the progression, and discontinuities, in our study of the philosophy of mind, and represents a major new sourcebook in a field of extreme importance to our understanding of humanity as a whole.​ | <p>The first thematically structured sourcebook on the history of philosophy of mind covering developments from Plato to [NAME] </p><p>Expert commentary provided by prominent scholars on key texts and all texts are presented in new translations   </p><p>Includes material on all of the main areas of Western philosophical psychology ​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7069-0 | Philosophy | Koehn | [NAME]; [NAME] | Aesthetics and Business Ethics |  | Issues in Business Ethics | 41 | 1 | 2014 | 149 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 149 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE14000 | Ethics | HPQ | SCW23008 | Business/Management Science, general | KJ | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part One: Aesthetical Dimensions of Ethical Judgments in Business.- 1. Literature, Emotions and Ethical Judgments in Business; [NAME]. Literature and the Canonical Values of Capitalism; [NAME] Michaelson.- Part Two:  The Aesthetic Firm.- 3. The Impoverished Aesthetic of Modern Management:  Beauty and Ethics in Organization; [NAME] An Aesthetic Theory of the Firm; [NAME] Dobson.- Part Three: Art and Personal Development.-  5. Business Ethics and the Arts:  Character and Process; Dawn Elm.- 6. Wisdom, Management, and Responsibility:  Aesthetics, Moral Imagination, and System Thinking; [NAME] Waddock.- Part Four:  Aesthetics and Business Ethics in the Classroom.- 7. Ethics, Morality and Art in the Classroom: Positive and Negative Relations; [NAME] Koehn.- 8.  Cheat: Changing the Figure; [NAME] and [NAME] Dunn.- 9. The Drama of Business Ethics; [NAME] and [NAME] | [NAME] famously said, “Ethics is aesthetics.” It is unclear what such a claim might mean and whether it is true. This book explores contentious issues arising at the interface of ethics and aesthetics. The contributions reflect on the status of aesthetic en ethical judgments, the relation of aesthetic beauty and ethical goodness and art and character development. The book further considers the potential role art could play in ethical analysis and in the classroom and explores in what respects aesthetics and ethics might be intertwined and even mutually supportive. | <p>Considers the potential role art could play in ethical analysis and in the classroom<br></p><p>Explores in what respects aesthetics and ethics might be intertwined<br></p><p>Includes specific works of art and exercises for use in teaching<br><br></p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6933-5 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME] | Institutions, Emotions, and Group Agents | Contributions to Social Ontology | Studies in the Philosophy of Sociality | 121 | 1 | 2014 | 367 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 367 p. 5 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE36000 | Philosophy of the Social Sciences | HPS | SCY20050 | Personality and Social Psychology | JMS | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Acknowledgements.- Introduction: Contributions to Social Ontology—Institutions, Emotions, and Group Agents; [NAME] and [NAME] Schmid.- Part I:  [NAME] and Institutions.- Chapter 1. Document Acts; [NAME] Smith.- Chapter 2. Searlean Reflections on Sacred Mountains; Filip Buekens.- Chapter 3. Social Objects without Intentions; [NAME] Epstein.- Chapter 4. The Logical Form of Totalitarianism; [NAME] Hudin.- Chapter 5. Groups, Normativity and Disagreement; [NAME] Brigido.- Chapter 6. Joint Actions, Social Institutions and Collective Goods: A Teleological Account; [NAME] Miller.- Chapter 7. Three Types of Heterotropic Intentionality: A Taxonomy in Social Ontology; [NAME] II:  Shared Emotions and Recognition.- Chapter 8. Emergence and [NAME]; [NAME] 9. The Functions of Collective Emotions in Social Groups; Mikko Salmela.- Chapter 10. Feelings of Being-Together and Caring With; [NAME] Guerrero.- Chapter 11. Joining the [NAME]: Habitual Sentiments behind We-Intentionality; Emanuele Caminada.- Chapter 12. [NAME] and Recognition from Others; Arto Laitinen.- Chapter 13. The Conditions of Collectivity: Joint Commitment and the Shared Norms of Membership; Titus Stahl.- Part III: Collective Reasons and Group Agency.- Chapter 14. Acting Over Time, Acting Together; [NAME] Bratman.- Chapter 15. How Where We Stand Constrains Where I Stand: Applying Bratman’s Account of Self-Governance to Collective Action; [NAME] Chapter 16. Team Reasoning and Shared Intention; [NAME] Roth.- Chapter 17. [NAME] and Practical Reason; [NAME] Gloor.- Chapter 18. Are Individualist Accounts of Collective Responsibility Morally Deficient?; András Szigeti.- Chapter 19. Can [NAME] Agents? A Challenge to the List-Pettit-Theory; [NAME] Andric.- Chapter 20. Direct and Indirect Common Belief; [NAME] and Andreas Herzig.​ | The contributions gathered in this volume present the state of the art in key areas of current social ontology. They focus on the role of collective intentional states in creating social facts, and on the nature of intentional properties of groups that allow characterizing them as responsible agents, or perhaps even as persons. Many of the essays are inspired by contemporary action theory, emotion theory, and theories of collective intentionality. Another group of essays revisits early phenomenological approaches to social ontology and accounts of sociality that draw on the Hegelian idea of recognition. This volume is organized into three parts. First, the volume discusses themes highlighted in [NAME] work and addresses questions concerning the relation between intentions and the deontic powers of institutions, the role of disagreement, and the nature of collective intentionality. Next, the book focuses on joint and collective emotions and mutual recognition, and then goes on to explore the scope and limits of group agency, or group personhood, especially the capacity for responsible agency.The variety of philosophical traditions mirrored in this collection provides readers with a rich and multifaceted survey of present research in social ontology. It will help readers deepen their understanding of three interrelated and core topics in social ontology: the constitution and structure of institutions, the role of shared evaluative attitudes, and the nature and role of group agents. | <p>Features contributions that present the state of the art in key areas of current social ontology</p><p>Examines the role of collective intentional states in creating social facts</p>Explores the core topics of constitution and structure of institutions, the role of shared evaluative attitudes, and the nature and role of group agents | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-25616-5 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME] | Value Theory | A Research into Subjectivity |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 343 | Hard cover | Book | XVII, 343 p. 3 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE00003 | Philosophy | HP | SCV20000 | Humanities, general | H | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: The Issue of Value and Philosophy.- [NAME] to Value.- Gnoseological Approach to Value.- Practical Approach to Value. | Humankind’s progress has always been driven by two momentums: the pursuit of truth and the creation of value. But our understanding of value, and our ability to reflect on its complexity, has long lagged behind our constant search for truth. This has, in turn limited our grasp of the essence of truth.This book takes philosophical contemplations on value to a new level, while also explicating some contemporary Chinese styles of philosophical thought. Over the past 25 years, this book has been having an increasing impact on Chinese readers and researchers, and it also provides a good platform for international dialogue on several key issues of philosophical studies. | <p>Unlocking a familiar and yet unfamiliar philosophical question</p><p><p>Attempting a convention-breaking way of critical thinking</p><p><p>Experiencing a people-oriented condition for rational pursuits </p><p><p>Helping you to return to the wisdom of life practices</p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-2152-4 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME] | Early Stoic Epistemology |  | Studies in the History of Philosophy of Mind | 10 | 1 | 2014 | 250 | Hard cover | Book | 250 p. | 0 | approx. | 99.95 | 106.95 | 109.95 | 90 | 143.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE13000 | Epistemology | HPK | SCE15000 | History of Philosophy | HPC | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Introduction.- 1. An Outline of [NAME]' Epistemology.- 2. Predecessors: [NAME], Aristotle, Zeno.- 3. The Foundations of Epistemology (i).- 4. The Foundations of Epistemology (ii).- 5. Rational Impressions.- 6. The Sources of Error.- 7. The Nature of Knowledge.- 8. [NAME] and Scientific Knowledge.- 9. Stoic Epistemology after Chrysippus.- Index of Subjects.- Index of Passages.- Bibliography. | This book looks at the epistemological views and arguments of the early Stoics, in particular those of [NAME] (3rd century BC), the third head of the Stoic school. It discusses such issues as the manner in which we perceive things and come to have notions of them, the reliability of arguments, the nature and variety of cognitive errors, and the possibility and nature of knowledge. Unlike most recent works on the subject, the aim of this book is to give a comprehensive account of Stoic epistemology as a whole as it was developed by [NAME]. The emphasis lies - more than usual - on how the epistemological views of the Stoics are interrelated, not only among themselves, but also with views belonging to their physics and logic. The author focuses on the ancient sources and does not attempt to cover all the subjects that are discussed in the scholarly literature, but in working with the sources, he makes extensive use of the latest scholarship on the subject. Our evidence for early Stoicism is quite poor. There are probably many views and arguments we will never get to know about. But we do find lots of passages bearing on various issues in Stoic epistemology in Sextus, Galen, Plutarch, Cicero, and a few others authors. Much of [NAME]'s work therefore consists of putting together bits and pieces of evidence from these authors so as to try and make sense of the subjects that we know the early Stoics discussed, some of which are listed above. | <P>The first comprehensive modern study of Stoic epistemology, which greatly influenced e.g. Descartes</P> <P>Builds on and critically assesses the latest research on the subject</P> <P>Gives access to issues that, because of poor source material, are not easily accessable to even advanced students and specialists</P> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7081-2 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME] | Accounting for the Public Interest | Perspectives on Accountability, Professionalism and Role in Society | Advances in Business Ethics Research | 4 | 1 | 2014 | 282 | Hard cover | Book | X, 282 p. 6 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE14000 | Ethics | HPQ | SCW23016 | Accounting/Auditing | KF | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  | The Philosophy of Accounting in the Public Interest.- Perceptions of Whistleblowing: Implications for the Profession.- Social Accounting in the Public Interest.- International Perspective on Environmental Accounting Research.- Facilitation Payments in International Business Transactions: Law, Accounting and the Public Interest.- Social and Economic Implications of Increasing Income Inequality.- De-Professionalization in Accounting.- The Public Interest and International Ethics Standards.- Regulation as Theory.- Educating Accounting Students in the Public Interest: Texas and California Experiences.- Educating Accounting Students in the Public Interest: Texas and California Experiences.- Environmental Accounting and Disclosure.- Social and Economic Implications of Increasing Income Inequality.- Fraud in Financial Statements: Public Interest and International Concerns | This volume explores the opportunities and challenges facing the accounting profession in an increasingly globalized business and financial reporting environment. It looks back at past experiences of the profession in attempting to meet its public interest obligation. It examines the role and responsibilities of accounting to society including regulatory requirements, increased emphasis on corporate social responsibility, accounting fraud and whistle-blowing implications, internationalization of public interest obligations, and providing the education needed to be successful. The book incorporates an ethical dimension in making these assessments. Its focus is a conceptual, theoretical one drawing on classical philosophy, the sociology of professions, economic theory, and the public interest dimension of accountants as professionals. The authors of papers are long-time contributors to the annual symposium on Research in Accounting Ethics sponsored by the Public Interest Section of the AAA. | <p>First book to focus on accounting in the public interest, examining the role and responsibilities of accounting to society </p><p>Uniquely prospective, providing insight into how the accounting profession can improve on meeting its primary obligation to serve the public interest  </p><p>Provides diverse viewpoints from philosophy, social accounting, economic considerations, and an international perspective on accounting for the public interest.</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6998-4 | Philosophy | Niazi | Kaveh Niazi | [NAME] and the Configuration of the Heavens | A Comparison of Texts and Models | Archimedes | 35 | 1 | 2014 | 190 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 190 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE34000 | Philosophy of Science | PDA | SCA12000 | History of Science | PDX | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Acknowledgement.- Note on Transliteration.- Chapter 1. Purpose and [NAME] of Study.- Chapter 2. The Mongols in Iran.- Chapter 3. [NAME]'s Life.- Chapter 4. The Principal Astronomical Sources.- Chapter 5. Persian vs. Arabic: Language as a Determinant of Content.- Chapter 6. Conclusion.- Figures- Bibliography.- Appendix A.- [NAME]. | As a leading scientist of the 13th century [NAME] wrote three substantial works on hay’a (or the configuration of the celestial orbs):  [NAME] fī dirāyat [NAME] (“The Limits of Attainment in the Understanding of the Heavens”), [NAME] fī ‘ilm al-hay’a (“The Royal Offering Regarding the Knowledge of the Configuration of the Heavens”), and Ikhtīyārāt-i Muẓaffarī (“The Muẓaffarī Elections”).  Completed in less than four years and written in two of the classical languages of the Islamic world, Arabic and Persian, these works provide a fascinating window to the astronomical research carried out in Ilkhanid Persia. Shīrāzī and his colleagues were driven by their desire to rid [NAME] astronomy from its perceived shortcomings.  An intriguing trail of revisions and emendations in Shīrāzī’s hay’a texts serves to highlight both those features of Shīrāzī's astronomy that were inherited from his predecessors, as well as his original contributions to this branch of astronomical research. As a renowned savant, Shīrāzī spent a large portion of his career near centers of political power in Persia and Anatolia.  A study of his scientific output and career as a scholar is an opportunity, therefore, for an examination of the patronage of science and of scientific works within the Ilkhanid realms. Not only was this patronage important to the work of scholars such as Shīrāzī but it was critical to the founding and operation of one of the foremost scientific institutions of the medieval Islamic world, the [NAME] observatory. The astronomical tradition in which Shīrāzī carried out his research has many links, as well, to the astronomy of Early Modern Europe, as can be seen in the astronomical models of Copernicus. | <p>This study clarifies the relationship between three well-known but little studied medieval works on astronomy</p><p>Provides a detailed biography of [NAME], a leading scientist of his era</p><p>Sheds light on the nature of the patronage of the sciences in Ilkhanid Persia</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7112-3 | Philosophy | Olberding | [NAME] | Dao Companion to the Analects |  | Dao Companions to Chinese Philosophy | 4 | 1 | 2014 | 410 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 410 p. | 0 | final | 169.99 | 181.89 | 186.99 | 153 | 226.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE33000 | Philosophy of Religion | HRAB | SCV26000 | Religious Studies | HRA | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction, [NAME] Olberding.- Part I: Text and Context.- 2. History and Formation of the Analects, Tae Hyun Kim and [NAME] Csikszentmihalyi.- 3. The Commentarial Tradition, [NAME] and On-cho Ng.- 4. Confucius and His Community, [NAME] Lo.- Part II: The Conceptual Landscape.- 5. Ren 仁 : An Exemplary Life, [NAME]. Ritual and [NAME] in the Analects, Hagop Sarkissian.- 7. Family Reverence (xiao 孝) in the Analects: Confucian Role Ethics and the Dynamics of Intergenerational Transmission, [NAME] and [NAME], Jr.- 8. Language and Ethics in the Analects, Hui-chieh Loy.- 9. Uprightness, Indirection, Transparency, Lisa Raphals.- 10. Cultivating the Self in Concert with Others, [NAME] 11. Perspectives on Moral Failure in the Analects, [NAME] Olberding.- Part III: Mapping the Landscape: Issues in Interpretation.- 12. The Analects and Moral Theory, [NAME] 13. Religious Thought and Practice in the Analects. [NAME] 14. The Analects and Forms of Governance, BAI Tongdong.- Why Care? A Feminist Re-appropriation of [NAME] 孝 Li-Hsiang, [NAME] Rosenlee.- 16. Balancing Conservatism and Innovation: The Pragmatic Analects, Sor-hoon Tan.- Index.- Index Locorum. | This volume surveys the major philosophical concepts, arguments, and commitments of the Confucian classic, the Analects. In thematically organized chapters, leading scholars provide a detailed, scholarly introduction to the text and the signal ideas ascribed to its protagonist, [NAME].  The volume opens with chapters that reflect the latest scholarship on the disputed origins of the text and an overview of the broad commentarial tradition it generated. These are followed by chapters that individually explore key areas of the text’s philosophical landscape, articulating both the sense of concepts such as ren, [NAME], and xiao as well as their place in the wider space of the text. A  final section addresses prominent interpretive challenges and scholarly disputes in reading the Analects, evaluating, for example, the alignment between the Analects and contemporary moral theory and the contested nature of its religious sensibility.  [NAME] to the Analects offers a comprehensive and complete survey of the text's philosophical idiom and themes, as well as its history and some of the liveliest current debates surrounding it. This book is an ideal resource for both researchers and advanced students interested in gaining greater insight into one of the earliest and most influential Confucian classics. | <p>Offers a comprehensive and complete survey of the philosophical idiom and themes of the <i>Analects</i></p><p><i></i>Features the work of some of the most influential scholars currently writing about the <i>Analects</i></p><p>Incorporates a diverse range of interpretive models and rehearses major philosophical methodologies applied to the text</p><p>Covers all major philosophical areas of scholarship on the <i>Analects</i></p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-3863-8 | Philosophy | O´Mathuna | Donal P O´Mathuna; [NAME]; [NAME] | Disaster Bioethics | Normative Issues When Nothing is Normal | Public Health Ethics Analysis | 2 | 1 | 2014 | 190 | Hard cover | Book | X, 190p. | 0 | approx. | 99.95 | 106.95 | 109.95 | 90 | 143.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE14000 | Ethics | HPQ | SCX00000 | Social Sciences, general | J | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part 1. Ethical issues in providing healthcare during disasters Evidence and healthcare needs during disastersMacro-triage in disaster planningMicro-triage in the midst of disastersPreparing and taking care of the carersMedia coverage of disaster healthcare When relief comes from a different culturePart 2. Ethical issues in disaster research Setting disaster research prioritiesProportionality of harms and benefitsCaring for disaster researchers Approval mechanisms for disaster researchConsent and respecting participants’ rights in disaster researchRespecting dignity in undignifying circumstances [NAME] of selected titlesSubject and/or Name IndexThe Brocher Principles of Disaster Bioethics | Disaster strikes: In 2004 it was the Indian Ocean tsunami; 2005, Hurricane Katrina; 2010, the earthquake in Haiti and floods in Pakistan; and this year? According to the International Disasters Database, almost 2800 disasters occurred between 2000 and 2005, compared to approximately 2700 during all of the 1990s. The number of people impacted by disasters tripled between 1990 and 2003. In that year, more than 250 million people were directly affected by a disaster.  Disasters cause immense pain and suffering, along with widespread death and destruction. They require an immediate response, but those responses raise ethical questions. How do doctors and nurses decide whom to care for? What care do the victims need first? How do international agencies decide what to send? What ethical responsibilities do the media bear? Is research justified during a disaster? If so, how will research ethics standards be maintained?  Such ethical questions need urgent and extensive discussion. This book provides in-depth and practical reflection on these and other challenging ethical questions. It presents the deliberations of scholars and practitioners who gathered at the Brocher Center in Geneva, Switzerland in 2011 and formulated the Brocher Principles of Disaster Bioethics. This book offers their findings to guide those concerned about responding ethically to the healthcare needs of disaster victims. | The first detailed examination of disaster bioethics covering both the ethics of disaster healthcare as well as disaster research  Taking a global perspective where the differences in culture and resources are acknowledged  Provides The Brocher Principles of Disaster Bioethics on how to ethically respond to the needs of disaster victims | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-00403-7 | Philosophy | Rodin | [NAME] | Axiomatic Method and Category Theory |  | Synthese Library | 364 | 1 | 2014 | 270 | Hard cover | Book | V, 270 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE13000 | Epistemology | HPK | SCM11035 | Category Theory, Homological Algebra | PBC | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Part I A Brief History of the Axiomatic Method.- Chapter 1. Euclid: Doing and Showing.- Chapter 2. Hilbert: Making It Formal.- Chapter 3. Formal Axiomatic Method and the 20th Century Mathematics.- Chapter. 4 Lawvere: Pursuit of Objectivity.- Conclusion of Part 1.- Part II. Identity and Categorification.- Chapter 5. Identity in Classical and Constructive Mathematics.- Chapter 6. Identity Through Change, Category Theory and Homotopy Theory.- Conclusion of Part 2.- Part III. Subjective Intuitions and Objective Structures.- Chapter 7. How Mathematical Concepts Get Their Bodies. Chapter 8. Categories versus Structures.- Chapter 9. New Axiomatic Method (instead of conclusion).- Bibliography.​ | This volume explores the many different meanings of the notion of the axiomatic method, offering an insightful historical and philosophical discussion about how these notions changed over the millennia. The author, a well-known philosopher and historian of mathematics, first examines Euclid, who is considered the father of the axiomatic method, before moving onto [NAME] and Lawvere. He then presents a deep textual analysis of each writer and describes how their ideas are different and even how their ideas progressed over time. Next, the book explores category theory and details how it has revolutionized the notion of the axiomatic method. It considers the question of identity/equality in mathematics as well as examines the received theories of mathematical structuralism. In the end, [NAME] presents a hypothetical New Axiomatic Method, which establishes closer relationships between mathematics and physics.Lawvere's axiomatization of topos theory and Voevodsky's axiomatization of higher homotopy theory exemplify a new way of axiomatic theory building, which goes beyond the classical [NAME]-style Axiomatic Method. The new notion of Axiomatic Method that emerges in categorical logic opens new possibilities for using this method in physics and other natural sciences.This volume offers readers a coherent look at the past, present and anticipated future of the Axiomatic Method. | <p>Offers readers a coherent look at the past, present and anticipated future of the Axiomatic Method</p><p><p>Provides a deep textual analysis of Euclid, [NAME], and [NAME] that describes how their ideas are different and how their ideas progressed over time </p><p>Presents a hypothetical New Axiomatic Method, which establishes closer relationships between mathematics and physics</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6805-5 | Philosophy | Schuppert | [NAME] | Freedom, Recognition and Non-Domination | A Republican Theory of (Global) Justice | Studies in Global Justice | 12 | 1 | 2014 | 201 | Hard cover | Book | XXI, 201 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE37000 | Political Philosophy | HPS | SCX18000 | Political Science, general | JPA | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Acknowledgments.- Introduction - A Republican Theory of (Global) Justice.- Chapter One: The Nature of Free Rational Agency.- Chapter Two: Analysing Freedom & Autonomy – Recognition, Responsibility and Threats to Agency.- Chapter Three: Needs, Interests and Rights.- Chapter Four: Capabilities, Freedom and Sufficiency.- Chapter Five: Collective Agency, Democracy and Political Institutions.- Chapter Six: Global Justice and Non-Domination.- Conclusion: Freedom, Recognition & Non-Domination.- Bibliography.- Index. | This book offers an original account of a distinctly republican theory of social and global justice. The book starts by exploring the nature and value of Hegelian recognition theory.  It shows the importance of that theory for grounding a normative account of free and autonomous agency.  It is this normative account of free agency which provides the groundwork for a republican conception of social and global justice, based on the core-ideas of freedom as non-domination and autonomy as non-alienation. As the author argues, republicans should endorse a sufficientarian account of social justice, which focuses on the nature of social relationships and their effects on people's ability to act freely and realize their fundamental interests. On the global level, the book argues for the cosmopolitan extension of the republican principles of non-domination and non-alienation within a multi-level democratic system. In so doing, the book addresses a major gap in the existing literature, presenting an original theory of justice, which combines Hegelian recognition theory and republican ideas of freedom, and applying this hybrid theory to the global domain. | <p>Is the first to offer a truly republican theory of social justice </p><p>Offers a comprehensive alternative to the dominant Rawlsian approaches to social and global justice </p><p>Sharpens our understanding of the nature and value of freedom and equality  </p><p>Provides a unique extension of republican ideas and recognition theory to the global domain​    </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7115-4 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME] | Secularisations and Their Debates | Perspectives on the Return of Religion in the Contemporary West | Sophia Studies in  Cross-cultural Philosophy of Traditions and [NAME] | 5 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 250 p. | 0 | approx. | 99.95 | 106.95 | 109.95 | 90 | 143.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE33000 | Philosophy of Religion | HRAB | SCX00000 | Social Sciences, general | J | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2013-09-02 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction: Secularization and its Discontents.- [NAME], D. Nickelson.- 2. Disenchantments of secularism: the West and India, P. Bilimoria.- 3. Locke, secularism and the justice of the secular solution: towards a self-reflective transcending of secular-self understanding, P.A. Quadrio.- 4. [NAME] and the Christian logic of the secular state, R.  Boer.- 5. Spirit matters: Life after secularism and religion? [NAME]. Counter-secularism: parsing the theological cure for our modern malady, D. Nickelson.- 7. ‘In the Beginning Was ... the Story’? On Secularisation, Narrative, and [NAME], M. Sharpe.- 8. Enjoy your Enlightenment! New Atheism, fanaticism and the joys of other people’s illusions, B. Cooke.- 9. Against fundamentalism: The silence of the Divine in the work of [NAME], P. Brown.- 10. Secularism stuck in the End-Times: From [NAME] to the recent [NAME], R. Jeffs.- 11. [NAME] search for transcendence: mystery, suffering, violence, J. Rundell.- 12. Towards post-secular Enlightenment, [NAME]. | This volume explores timely topics in contemporary political and social debates, including: the new atheisms, the debate between Habermas and the Pope on the fate of modernity, and the impact of new scientific developments on traditional religions.This book collects articles first presented at the Deakin University 'World in Crisis' workshop, held November 2010 by leading Australasian philosophers and theologians. It addresses questions raised by the recent, much-touted return to religion, including possible reasons for the return and its practical, political, and intellectual prospects. Secularisation and Their Debates is not afraid to provide answers to such questions as: Is religion only ever a force of political reaction in modernity, or are there resources in it which progressive, even secular social movements, could engage with or adopt? Are the new atheisms, or on the opposite side, the new fundamentalisms, really novel phenomena, or has religion only ever been artificially sidelined in the modern Western states? Has modern liberalism only really been kidding itself about its non-doctrinal neutrality between different faiths, and if so, what should follow? This book will appeal to researchers in the philosophy of religion, social sciences, political philosophy, and anthropology. | <p>Leading Australiasian philosophers of religion take up and advance the current debates about secularisation and religion</p><p>Explores extremely timely topics in contemporary political and social debates: the new atheisms, the debate between Habermas and the Pope on the fate of modernity, the impact of new scientific developments on traditional religions</p><p>Particular focus on radical criticisms of modern secular liberal societies in the thought of [NAME] and the radical orthodox school of theology</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-00791-5 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME] | Adaptive Logics for Defeasible Reasoning | Applications in Argumentation, Normative Reasoning and Default Reasoning | Trends in Logic | 38 | 1 | 2013 | 425 | Hard cover | Book | XVI, 425 p. 34 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE16000 | Logic | HPL | SCI21017 | Artificial Intelligence (incl. Robotics) | UYQ | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. Introduction.- Part I. Adaptive Logics as a Framework for Defeasible Logics.- Chapter 2 The Standard Format of Adaptive Logics.- Chapter 3. Sequential Combinations of ALs.- Chapter 4. On the Transparency of Defeasible Logics: Equivalent Premise Sets, Equivalence of Their Extensions, and Maximality of the Lower Limit.- Chapter 5. Generalizing the Standard Format.- Part II. Conditional Logics of Normality.- Chapter 6. Adaptively Applying Modus Ponens in Conditional Logics of Normality.- Chapter 7. An Adaptive Logic for Rational Closure.- Part III. Argumentation Theory.- Chapter 8. Towards the Proof-Theoretic Unification of Dung’s Argumentation Framework: An Adaptive Logic Approach.- Chapter 9. Allowing for Joint Attacks.- Part IV. Deontic Logics.- Chapter 10. Avoiding Deontic Explosion by Contextually Restricting Modal Inheritance.- Chapter 11. An Adaptive Logic Framework for Conditional Obligations and Deontic Dilemmas.- Chapter 12. A Deontic Logic Framework Allowing for Factual Detachment.- Appendices. ​ | This book presents adaptive logics as an intuitive and powerful framework for modeling defeasible reasoning. It examines various contexts in which defeasible reasoning is useful and offers a compact introduction into adaptive logics. The author first familiarizes readers with defeasible reasoning, the adaptive logics framework, combinations of adaptive logics, and a range of useful meta-theoretic properties. He then offers a systematic study of adaptive logics based on various applications. The book presents formal models for defeasible reasoning stemming from different contexts, such as default reasoning, argumentation, and normative reasoning. It highlights various meta-theoretic advantages of adaptive logics over other logics or logical frameworks that model defeasible reasoning. In this way the book substantiates the status of adaptive logics as a generic formal framework for defeasible reasoning. | <p>Presents adaptive logics as an intuitive and powerful framework to model defeasible reasoning</p><p>Features intuitive examples and case studies </p><p>Details a range of applications that will appeal to researchers with various interests and backgrounds</p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11649 | Mathematics and Statistics
 | 978-94-007-7045-4 | Philosophy | Trypuz | [NAME] | [NAME] on Logic of Actions |  | Outstanding Contributions to Logic | 1 | 1 | 2014 | 308 | Hard cover | Book | XXXII, 308 p. 40 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE16000 | Logic | HPL | SCI1603X | Logics and Meanings of Programs | UM | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction; [NAME] 1. '[NAME] Philosophy of Action';  Richmond Thomason.-  2. 'The concept of a routine in Segerberg’s philosophy of action';  Dag Elgesem.- 3. 'On the Reconciliation of Logics of Agency and Logics of Event Types';  Jan Broersen.- 4. 'Three traditions in the logic of action: bringing them together';  [NAME],  Tiago de Lima,  [NAME],  and  [NAME]. 'Deontic Logics based on Boolean Algebra';  [NAME]  and  Piotr Kulicki.- 6. 'Dynamic Deontic Logic, Segerberg-Style';  [NAME] Meyer.-  PART II.- 7. 'Contraction, Revision, Expansion - Representing Belief Change Operations';  [NAME] Hansson.- 8. '[NAME] on the Paradoxes of Introspective Belief Change';  [NAME]  and  [NAME] Enqvist.- 9. 'Equivalent Beliefs in Dynamic Doxastic Logic';  [NAME] Goldblatt.- 10. 'On revocable and irrevocable belief revision';  [NAME] Ditmarsch.- 11. 'Actions, belief update, and DDL';  [NAME]12. 'DDL as an “Internalization” of Dynamic Belief Revision';  [NAME], [NAME], and  Sonja Smets.- 13. 'Two logical faces of belief revision';  [NAME]. ​ | This volume describes and analyzes in a systematic way the great contributions of the philosopher [NAME] to the study of real and doxastic actions.  Following an introduction which functions as a roadmap to [NAME]'s works on actions, the first part of the book covers relations between actions, intentions and routines, dynamic logic as a theory of action, agency, and deontic logics built upon the logics of actions. The second section explores belief revision and update, iterated and irrevocable beliefs change, dynamic doxastic logic and hypertheories.[NAME] has worked for more than thirty years to analyze the intricacies of real and doxastic actions using formal tools - mostly modal (dynamic) logic and its semantics. He has had such a significant impact on modal logic that 'It is hard to roam for long in modal logic without finding [NAME] traces,' as [NAME] notes in his chapter of this book. | <p>Offers a systematic study of Segerberg‘s works on logic of actions </p><p>Presents a detailed analysis of the use of formal methods in the domain of real and doxastic actions   </p><p>Covers relations between actions, intentions and routines, and explores belief revision and update, dynamic doxastic logic and hypertheories​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-00481-5 | Philosophy | Urbaniak | Rafal [NAME] | Leśniewski's Systems of Logic and Foundations of Mathematics |  | Trends in Logic | 37 | 1 | 2013 | 226 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 226 p. 3 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | SCE34000 | Philosophy of Science | PDA | SCM24005 | Mathematical Logic and Foundations | PBC | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2. Leśniewski's early philosophical views.- Chapter 3. Leśniewski's Protothetic.-  Chapter 4. Leśniewski's Ontology.- Chapter 5. Leśniewski's Mereology.- Chapter 6. Leśniewski and definitions.- Chapter 7. Sets revisited.- Chapter 8. Nominalism and higher-order quantification. ​ | This meticulous critical assessment of the ground-breaking work of philosopher Stanislaw  Leśniewski focuses exclusively on primary texts and explores the full range of output by one of the master logicians of the Lvov-Warsaw school. The author’s nuanced survey eschews secondary commentary, analyzing Leśniewski's core philosophical views and evaluating the formulations that were to have such a profound influence on the evolution of mathematical logic.   One of the undisputed leaders of the cohort of brilliant logicians that congregated in Poland in the early twentieth century, Leśniewski was a guide and mentor to a generation of celebrated analytical philosophers ([NAME] was among his PhD students). His primary achievement was a system of foundational mathematical logic intended as an alternative to the Principia Mathematica of [NAME] and [NAME]. Its three strands—‘protothetic’, ‘ontology’, and ‘mereology’, are detailed in discrete sections of this volume, alongside a wealth other chapters grouped to provide the fullest possible coverage of Leśniewski’s academic output. With material on his early philosophical views, his contributions to set theory and his work on nominalism and higher-order quantification, this book offers a uniquely expansive critical commentary on one of analytical philosophy’s great pioneers.​ | <p>Accessible introduction to Leśniewski's foundations of mathematics </p><p>Critical analysis covers Leśniewski’s philosophical views as well as his contributions to mathematical logic </p><p>Exclusive focus on primary texts reveals the core principles of Leśniewski’s work ​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11649 | Mathematics and Statistics
 | 978-1-4614-7806-5 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] [NAME] | Evidence-Based Interventions for Children with Challenging Behavior |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 210 | Hard cover | Book | XXII, 210 p. | 0 | final | 49.99 | 53.49 | 54.99 | 44.99 | 67 | English | Psychology | SCY12040 | Child and School Psychology | JMC | SCO33000 | Assessment, Testing and Evaluation | JNKD | Psychology | Graduate/advanced undergraduate textbook | Springer New York | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: Common Early Childhood Behavior Problems.- Chapter 2: Early Childhood Development Theories.- Chapter 3: The Prevention Model and Problem Solving.- Chapter 4: Screening Techniques.- Chapter 5: Evidence-Based Practices with Children and their Caregivers.- Chapter 6: Behavioral Terms and Principles.- Chapter 7: Applying Principles of Behavior.- Chapter 8: Progress Monitoring.- Chapter 9: Evaluating Outcomes.- Chapter 10: Summary & Conclusions of Best Practices in Providing Services for YCCB.- Appendix A: Developmental Milestones References.- Appendix B: ABC Chart for Determining a Behavior’s Function.- Appendix C: HOT DOCS Behavior Chart.- Appendix D: Graphing by Hand.- Glossary of Terms.- References. | When a child has difficulties eating or sleeping, or throws frequent tantrums, many parents cross their fingers and hope it's a phase to be outgrown soon. But when they persist, challenging behaviors can follow children to school, contributing to academic problems, social difficulties, and further problems in adolescence and adulthood.The authors of Evidence-Based Interventions for Children with Challenging Behavior take a preventive approach in this concise, well-detailed guide. Offering best practices from an extensive Response to Intervention (RTI) evidence base, the book provides guidelines for recognizing the extent of feeding, sleeping, toileting, aggression, and other issues, and supplies successful primary, secondary, and tertiary interventions with rationales. Case examples integrate developmental theories and behavior principles into practice, illustrate how strategies work, and show how to ensure that parents and caregivers can implement them consistently for maximum effect. Progress charts, content questions, and other helpful features make this an invaluable resource for students and professionals alike. Included in the coverage:The prevention model and problem solving.Screening techniques.Evidence-based practices with children and their caregivers.Behavior principles and their application.Monitoring progress and evaluating outcomes.Plus helpful appendices, resource links, and other learning tools.Evidence-Based Interventions for Children with Challenging Behavior is an essential text for graduate students, scientist-practitioners/professionals, and researchers in child and school psychology; assessment, testing and evaluation; occupational therapy; family; educational psychology; and speech pathology. | <p>​Differentiates between normal childhood behaviors and those that may require early intervention to promote long-term healthy development</p><p>Explores early childhood prevention and intervention using problem-solving strategies based in a response-to-intervention approach</p><p>Provides a model for tailoring interventions to the unique needs of young children</p><p>Discusses how to monitor progress and evaluate outcomes ​</p> | Students | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-7405-0 | Psychology | Bögels | [NAME]; [NAME] | Mindful Parenting | A Guide for Mental Health Practitioners | Mindfulness in Behavioral Health |  | 1 | 2013 | 318 | Hard cover | Book | XVIII, 318 p. 50 illus. | 0 | final | 59.99 | 64.19 | 65.99 | 53.99 | 80 | English | Psychology | SCY12040 | Child and School Psychology | JMC | SCH5400X | Psychotherapy | MMJT | Psychology | Professional book | Springer New York | In production | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Part I. Theoretical and Empirical Background.- Chapter 1. Introduction to Mindful Parenting.- Chapter 2. An Evolutionary Perspective on Parenting and Parenting Stress.- Chapter 3. Effects of the Mindful Parenting Course.- Part II. Mindful Parenting: A Guide to the 8 Week Program.- Chapter 4: Overview and Guidelines for the Mindful Parenting Program.- Chapter 5: Session 1: Automatic Parenting.- Chapter 6: Session 2: [NAME] Parenting.- Chapter 7: Session 3: Reconnecting with our Body as a Parent.- Chapter 8: Session 4: Responding vs. Reacting to Parenting Stress.- Chapter 9: Session 5: Parenting Patterns and Schemas.- Chapter 10: Session 6: Conflict and Parenting.- Chapter 11: Session 7: Love and Limits.- Chapter 12: Session 8: Are We There yet? A Mindful Path Through Parenting.- Chapter 13: Follow-up Session: Each Time, Beginning Anew.- Chapter 14: Voices of the Parents: Life After the Mindful Parenting Course. | Despite its inherent joys, the challenges of parenting can produce considerable stress. These challenges multiply—and the quality of parenting suffers—when a parent or child has mental health issues, or when parents are in conflict. Even under optimal circumstances, the constant changes as children develop can tax parents' inner resources, often undoing the best intentions and parenting courses. Mindful Parenting: A Guide for Mental Health Practitioners offers an evidence-based, eight week structured mindfulness training program for parents with lasting benefits for parents and their children. Designed for use in mental health contexts, its methods are effective whether parents or children have behavioral or emotional issues. The program's eight sessions focus on mindfulness-oriented skills for parents, such as responding to (as opposed to reacting to) parenting stress, handling conflict with children or partners, fostering empathy, and setting limits. The book dovetails with other clinical mindfulness approaches, and is written clearly and accessibly so that professionals can learn the material easily and impart it to clients. Featured in the text:  Detailed theoretical, clinical, and empirical foundations of the program.The complete Mindful Parenting manual with guidelines for eight sessions and a follow-up.Handouts and assignments for each session.Findings from clinical trials of the Mindful Parenting program.Perspectives from parents who have finished the course. Its clinical focus and empirical support make Mindful Parenting an invaluable tool for practitioners and clinicians in child, school, and family psychology, psychotherapy/counseling, psychiatry, social work, and developmental psychology. | <p>Offers an evidence-based eight-week mindful parenting program </p><p>Systematically trains psychotherapists in mindfulness techniques to help families cope more effectively with day-to-day stresses</p><p>Includes psychoeducational information on how parental and child stress and psychopathology affect the family dynamic </p><p>Discusses how to prevent the transmission of maladaptive parenting patterns</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-7415-9 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME] | After-School Prevention Programs for At-Risk Students | Promoting Engagement and [NAME] |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 134 | Hard cover | Book | XX, 134 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Psychology | SCY12040 | Child and School Psychology | JMC | SCO37000 | Childhood Education | [NAME] | Psychology | Monograph | Springer New York | In production | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- [NAME] to Group-Centered Learning Center Interventions.- Chapter 1: Organizing an After-School Program.- Chapter 2: The Group-Centered Approach.- Chapter 3: Combining Learning and Counseling into One After-school Program.- Chapter 4: The Role of Motivation in an Ongoing Year-long Program.- Chapter 5: Group Process, Self-Efficacy, and Cohesion:  Applying the Principles of Change.- Chapter 6: Interaction in a Year-long Program.- Chapter 7: Solving Conflicts and Problems.- Chapter 8: After-School Programs and the School Mission. | After-School Prevention Programs for At-Risk Students offers professionals a detailed framework for developing and enhancing after-school programs. Emphasizing a prevention focus and a group-centered interactive approach, the book's year-long model combines education and counseling, incorporating key therapeutic objectives to foster academic and behavior skills and reduce problems in and outside class. Practical step-by-step guidelines for creating and implementing programs include clear rationales, instructive design and case examples, and ready-to-use interventions. The author also provides guidance on developmental, gender, and cultural considerations, the challenges of maintaining progress over the course of the school year, and the handling of severe learning and emotional problems. Among the topics covered:Organizing a group-centered after-school program.Combining learning and counseling into one curriculum.The role of motivation in an ongoing year-long program.Group process, self-efficacy, cohesion: applying the principles of change.Interaction in a year-long program.Solving problems and conflicts.After-School Prevention Programs for At-Risk Students is an essential reference for scientist-practitioners, clinicians, and academics in such disciplines as school psychology, childhood education, social work, psychotherapy and counseling, and learning and instruction. | <p>​Provides theoretical and research bases for designing after-school programs that ensure academic success for at-risk students</p><p>Features instructive case examples and evidence-based group-centered interventions</p><p>Offers observational exercises to assist readers in gaining a deeper understanding of how group process works</p><p>Shows how after-school gains translate into improved classroom performance and reduced dropout rates​</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-0-387-72638-0 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME] | The Neuropsychology of Attention |  |  |  | 2 | 2013 | 975 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 975 p. 68 illus., 13 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 199.99 | 213.99 | 219.99 | 180 | 266.5 | English | Psychology | [NAME] | Neuropsychology | JMM | SCH36001 | Neurology | MJN | Psychology | Monograph | Springer US | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part One: Foundations.- Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2:   Historical and Philosophical Antecedents.- Chapter 3: Cognitive Psychology of Attention.- Chapter 4:   Cognitive science of attention: Current concepts and approaches.- Chapter 5:    Intention, Response Selection, and Executive-Attention.- Chapter 6:   Focused and Sustained Attention.- Chapter 7: Behavioral Perspectives.- Chapter 8:  Orienting Response: Index of Attention.- Chapter 9:   Physiological Substrates of Attention.- Chapter 10: Neural Mechanisms of Attention.- Chapter 11: Models and Mechanisms of Attention.- Part II. Neuropsychology of Attention.- Chapter 12:   Disorders of Sensory Selective Attention.- Chapter 13:  Attention and the Frontal Cortex.- Chapter 14: Subcortical and Limbic Influences.- Chapter 15:  Attention Disturbances Associated with Neurological Disease.- Chapter 16: Medical Disorders and Behavioral Risk Factors.- Chapter 17:  Psychiatric Disturbances of Attention.- Chapter 18: Developmental Disorders.- Chapter 19:  Clinical Considerations: Assessment and Treatment.- Chapter 20: Neuropsychological Models of Attention Disturbance.- Part III.  Toward an Integrated Attentional Framework.- Chapter 21: Consciousness and Self-Directed Attention.- Chapter 22: Neural Constraints on Attention.- Chapter 23: Processing Speed and Attentional Resources.- Chapter 24:   Mutual Constraints of Memory and Attention.- Chapter 25: Spatial and Temporal Determinants of Attention.- Chapter 26: Neuroimaging of Attention.- Chapter 27: Computational Models for the Analysis of Attention.- Chapter 28: Neuropsychology of Attention: Synthesis. | It has been 15 years since the original publication of Neuropsychology of Attention. At the time of its publication, attention was a construct that had long been of theoretical interest in the field of psychology and was receiving increased research by cognitive scientists. Yet, attention was typically viewed as a nuisance variable; a factor that needed to be accounted for when assessing brain function, but of limited importance in its own right. There is a need for a new edition of this book within Neuropsychology to present an updated and integrated review of what is know about attention, the disorders that affect it, and approaches to its clinical assessment and treatment. Such a book will provide perspectives for experimental neuropsychological study of attention and also provide clinicians with insights on how to approach this neuropsychological domain. | <p>Integrates current neuropsychological knowledge with research coming from cognitive and neuroscientific research</p><ul><p></ul><p>Presents information derived from recent developments in the fields of functional and structural brain imaging</p><p>Updated clinical chapters offer state of the art methods for the assessment and treatment of attention disturbances, providing possibilities for addressing these and other real-life concerns</p><ul><p></ul><p> </p><p> </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11650 | Medicine
 | 978-1-4614-7455-5 | Psychology | Culp | Anne McDonald Culp | Child and [NAME] | Bridging the Gaps Between Research, Practice, and Policy | Issues in Clinical Child Psychology |  | 1 | 2013 | 303 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 303 p. 3 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Psychology | SCY12040 | Child and School Psychology | JMC | [NAME] | Family | JHBK | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Section I – Introduction.- 1. The Well-Being of Children in the United States: Evidence for a Call for Action.- 2. Advocating For Children, Youth and Families in the Policy Making Process.- Section II – Selected Child Issues in Need of Advocacy Effort.- 3. [NAME] Health:  The Importance of Collaboration and Public Understanding.- 4. Health Reform: A Bridge to Health Equity.- 5. [NAME] Prevention.- 6. Strategies for Ending Homelessness among Children and Families.- 7. Lessons Learned about the Impact of Disasters on Children and Families and Post-Disaster Recovery.- 8. Early Childhood Education and Care:  Legislative and [NAME] Efforts.- 9. Education Reform Strategies for Student Self-Regulation and Community Engagement.- 10. Media Violence and Children:  Applying Research to Advocacy.- 11. Changing Juvenile Justice Practice & Policy:  Implementing Evidence-Based Practices in Louisiana.- 12.  Advocacy for Child Welfare Reform.- 13.  American Indian/Alaska Native Children and Families.- Section III.  Illustrations of Advocacy Practices.- 14. A Multi-level Framework for Local Policy Development and Implementation.- 15. When Evidence and Values Collide:   Preventing Sexually Transmitted Infections.- 16. Lessons from the Legislative History of Federal Special Education Law: A Vignette for Advocates.- 17. The Promise of Family Engagement: An Action Plan for System-level Policy and Advocacy.- Section IV.  History of Division 37.- 18. The Evolving Legacy of the American Psychological Association’s Division 37: Bridging Research, Practice, and Policy to Benefit Children and Families History of Society for Child and Family Policy & Practice. | Current statistics on child abuse, neglect, poverty, and hunger shock the conscience—doubly so as societal structures set up to assist families are failing them. More than ever, the responsibility of the helping professions extends from aiding individuals and families to securing social justice for the larger community. With this duty in clear sight, the contributors to Child and Family Advocacy assert that advocacy is neither a dying art nor a lost cause but a vital platform for improving children's lives beyond the scope of clinical practice. This uniquely practical reference builds an ethical foundation that defines advocacy as a professional competency, and identifies skills that clinicians and researchers can use in advocating at the local, state, and federal levels. Models of the advocacy process coupled with first-person narratives demonstrate how professionals across disciplines can lobby for change.  Among the topics discussed: Promoting children's mental health: collaboration and public understanding.Health reform as a bridge to health equity.Preventing child maltreatment: early intervention and public educationChanging juvenile justice practice and policy.A multi-level framework for local policy development and implementation.When evidence and values collide: preventing sexually transmitted infections.Lessons from the legislative history of federal special education law. [NAME] and [NAME] is an essential resource for researchers, professionals, and graduate students in clinical child and school psychology, family studies, public health, developmental psychology, social work, and social policy. | <p>​Establishes a model integrating research and advocacy practice and policy for children, youth, families, and communities</p><p>Provides a substantive knowledge base for effective social policy with training tools for professional advocacy</p><p>Describes a range of advocacy skills, from grassroots efforts to testifying before legislative bodies</p><p>Details how research informs advocacy efforts at the community, state, and federal levels</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-8074-7 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME] | Neuropsychology of Asians and Asian-Americans | Practical and Theoretical Considerations | Issues of Diversity in Clinical Neuropsychology |  | 1 | 2014 | 335 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 335 p. 4 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Psychology | [NAME] | Neuropsychology | JMM | SCY20100 | Cross Cultural Psychology | JMH | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1 Overview of Issues Related to Serving Asian and Asian American Clients.-1.1 Introduction.- 1.2 Cultural Competence.- 1.3 Who are “Asian Americans”?.- 1.4 Cultural variables that influence neuropsychological services.- 1.4.1 Client Characteristics.- 1.4.2 Variables related to tests and test batteries.- 1.5 Conclusions.- 1.6 References.- Chapter 2 Ethical considerations in neuropsychological assessment of Asian heritage clients.- 2.1 Introduction.- 2.2 The importance of values in cross-cultural neuropsychology practice.- 2.3 Culturally invariant ethical and moral principles.- 2.4 Internationalization of psychological ethics.- 2.5 Neuropsychology and the Interpreter.- 2.5.1 Use of interpreters.- 2.5.2 Ethical duties of the Interpreter.- 2.6 Some Issues Pertaining to Specific Ethical Standards.- 2.6.1 Competency.- 2.6.2 Informed consent and confidentiality.- 2.6.3 Assessment procedures.- 2.7 Some summary considerations.- 2.8 References.- Chapter 3 Linguistic Factors and Language Assessment of Asians.- 3.1 Introduction.- 3.2 Theoretical foundations in linguistic science.- 3.2.1 The Language Acquisition Device (LAD).- 3.2.2 The Critical Period Hypothesis.- 3.2.3 Language and linguistic features defined.- 3.2.4 Native versus non-native languages.- 3.2.5 L1 interference and transfer.- 3.2.6 Interlanguage and fossilization.- 3.3 Features of English that frequently pose problems to L2 speakers.- 3.3.1 Pronunciation: Consonants.- 3.3.2 Pronunciation: Vowels.- 3.3.3 Pronunciation: Supra-segmental phonology.- 3.3.4 Lexicon: Native and borrowed vocabulary.- 3.3.5 Lexicon: Noun characteristics.- 3.3.6 Morpho-syntax: Prepositions.- 3.3.7 Morphosyntax: Subject/verb agreement.- 3.4 Case studies of two Asian languages.- 3.4.1 Case study: Chinese.- 3.4.2 Case Study: Japanese.- 3.5 Testing English proficiency.- 3.6 Asian Englishes.- 3.7 Conclusions.- 3.8 References.- Chapter 4 Society and Acculturation in Asian American Communities.- 4.1 Asian Philosophies and Religions.- 4.1.1 Confucianism.- 4.1.2 Taoism.- 4.1.3 Buddhism.- 4.2 Values, Beliefs, Emotions, and Interpersonal Behaviors of Asians.- 4.2.1 Valuing learning and education.- 4.2.2 Family orientation.- 4.2.3 Interdependency.- 4.2.4 Power distance.- 4.2.5 Face saving.- 4.2.6 Indirectness in communication.- 4.2.7 Avoid going to extremes and moderate emotions.- 4.2.8 Acceptance of contradictions, and mixed emotions.- 4.2.9 Suppression of emotional expression.- 4.3 Holistic thinking and test performance.- 4.4 Response biases.- 4.5 Acculturation.- 4.5.1 Acculturation Theory and Measurement.- 4.5.2 Acculturation Assessment.- 4.6 Conclusions.- 4.7 References.- Chapter 5 Mental Illness from an Asian American Perspective.- 5.1 Introduction.- 5.2 Prevalence rate of Mental Illness in Asia.- 5.3 Nosology and the medical model.- 5.4 The role of Eastern philosophies.- 5.5 Morita Therapy.- 5.6 Caveat.- 5.7 References.- Chapter 6 Understanding Differences in Cognition across the Lifespan: Comparing Eastern and Western Cultures.- 6.1 Introduction.- 6.2 Developmental Differences in Children and Adolescents.- 6.2.1 Academic Achievement.- 6.2.2 Cognitive Functioning.- 6.2.3 Social Cognition.- 6.2.4 Adaptive Functioning.- 6.2.5 Additional Influences on Culture-Based Differences in Cognitive Development.- 6.3 Differences in Cognition in Mature Adults.- 6.3.1 Academic Achievement.- 6.3.2 Cognitive Functioning.- 6.3.3 Visual Perception.- 6.3.4 Social Cognition.- 6.3.5 Influences Related to Individualism vs. Collectivism.- 6.4 Differences in cognition in older adults.- 6.5 Influence of Acculturation, Language, and Related Factors on Test Performance.- 6.6 Conclusions.- 6.7 References.- Chapter 7 Understanding the Neuroscience of Clients with Asian Heritage. 7.1 Cultural Neuroscience.- 7.2 The Influence of Culture on Psychological Processes.- 7.2.1 Perception.- 7.2.3 Attention.- 7.2.4 Arithmetic.- 7.2.5 La | Neuropschology with Asians and Asian Americans Practical and Theoretical Considerations [NAME] and [NAME], editors  The challenge of cultural competence for health providers is more than the recognition of other ethnicities: it entails the balancing of group and individual factors to apply relevant information in diagnostic and therapeutic settings. Particularly in need of culturally appropriate services are Asians and Asian Americans, populations that are diverse, growing, and underserved by Asian practitioners. Neuropsychology with Asians and Asian Americans takes cultural neuroscience to new levels in its variety and usefulness. Focusing on the largest groups of Far East and Southeast Asian descent, this leading-edge reference examines the influence of culture on psychological processes and identifies sociocultural factors as they influence neurological aspects of client presentation. This expert coverage goes beyond well-known constructs of 'collectivism' and 'family orientation' toward establishing an evidence base crucial to understanding, assessing, and treating Asian and Asian American clients, including:  Linguistic factors and language assessment of Asians.Society and acculturation in Asian and Asian American communitiesMental illness from  Asian and Asian American perspectives.Understanding cognitive differences across the lifespan: comparing Eastern and Western culturesClinical interviews and qualitative assessment with Asian clientsNeuropsychological test selection with Asian clients [NAME] in its scope and detail, Neuropsychology with  Asians and Asian Americans is a necessary resource for neuropsychologists and rehabilitation specialists as well as social workers and clinical, counseling, and school psychologists. | <p>Summarizes cultural, linguistic, religious/spiritual, cognitive, neurological, and psychometric factors specific to Asian American clients.</p><p> Focuses on Asian American population, allowing greater depth of coverage than is possible in the competing texts covering entire field of cross-cultural neuropsychology. </p><p>Emphasizes practical information while also providing theoretical background information.</p> | Professionals | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-7680-1 | Psychology | Fetzer | [NAME]; [NAME] | Simulations for Personnel Selection |  |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 290 | Hard cover | Book | XVIII, 290 p. 37 illus., 15 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Psychology | [NAME] | Industrial, Organisational and Economic Psychology | JMJ | SCY20000 | Psychology Research | JMB | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Simulations for Personnel Selection: An Introduction.- Part I:  The Broader View.- Simulations in the Selection Context: Considerations, [NAME], and Opportunities.- Candidate Reactions to Simulations and Media-Rich Assessments in Personnel Selection.- Simulation Technologies.- Simulation Scoring.- Part II:  Simulations in Action.- Designing and Implementing Software and Computer Skills Simulations.- How to Measure Contact Center Skills Using Multimedia Simulations.- Show Me You Can Do It: The Use of Interactive Simulations in Manufacturing Settings.- Simulations for Service Roles.- Managerial Simulations.- Tracing Cognition with Assessment Center Simulations: Using Technology to See in the Dark.- Future Directions. | ​This book provides a comprehensive and state-of-the-art overview of simulation development, technologies, and implementation, including real-world examples and results followed by a preview of what’s on the horizon that will further revolutionize the industry.  More than a handful of books have been written on the use of simulations for training purposes, but this book focuses solely on simulations in employee selection contexts (e.g., hiring, promotion), making it a truly unique and valuable resource for both practitioners and academics. The science and practice of employee selection has advanced at a steady pace over the past two or three decades. However, recent advancements in both technology and assessment methods have been the catalyst for an evolutionary leap in the use of simulations in this area. | ​Provides comprehensive coverage of the latest selection and most innovative simulation technologies currently in use for employee selection<br>Provides "real world" examples of how simulations work in practice<br>Contributors are recognized leaders in this area, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-7446-3 | Psychology | Finkel | [NAME]; [NAME] | Behavior Genetics of Cognition Across the Lifespan |  | Advances in Behavior Genetics | 1 | 1 | 2014 | 524 | Hard cover | Book | I, 524 p. 22 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Psychology | SCY20000 | Psychology Research | JMB | SCB12008 | Human Genetics | MFN | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I: Childhood.- 1.Cognitive abilities in childhood and adolescence.-2.Interactions between socioeconomic status and components of variation in cognitive ability.-3.Genetic and environmental influences on intellectual disability in childhood.- Part II: Adulthood.- 4.Cognition in middle adulthood.-5.Normative cognitive aging.- 6.Gene by environment interplay in cognitive aging.- 7.Dementia: Genes, environments, interactions.- Part III: Biology and Neurobiology.- 8.Brain imaging and cognition.- 9.Animal models of general cognitive ability for genetic research into cognitive functioning.- Part IV: Conclusion.-10.Future directions.- | Along with psychopathology, cognition has been one of the primary phenotypic focal points of the field of behavior genetics since its inception. [NAME] 1874 examination of eminent families in Britain was among the earliest attempts to investigate whether cognitive achievements run in families. This volume presents current methodologies for understanding cognitive abilities that move beyond the outdated nature vs. nurture paradigm. Recent advances in both collection and statistical modeling of twin data, particularly longitudinal twin data, make this an especially advantageous moment to produce a work that presents a collection of the groundbreaking research on cognitive abilities across the lifespan. This volume presents an overview of the current state of quantitative and molecular genetic investigations into the many facets of cognitive performance and functioning across the lifespan.​ | <p>​Lifespan perspective that acknowledges the accumulating impact of genetic and environmental influences</p><p>Inclusion of research on both normative and non-normative cognitive functioning</p><p>Input from related fields of physiology and animal behavior that elucidates current research and points to possible future research directions</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-8105-8 | Psychology | Goldstein | [NAME]; [NAME] | Handbook of Executive Functioning |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 580 | Hard cover | Book | XX, 580 p. 43 illus., 20 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 249 | 266.43 | 273.9 | 224.5 | 331.5 | English | Psychology | SCY20010 | Developmental Psychology | JMC | SCO33000 | Assessment, Testing and Evaluation | JNKD | Psychology | Handbook | Springer New York | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- SECTION I: CONCEPTUALIZATIONS OF EXECUTIVE FUNCTIONING.- Chapter 1. Introduction:  A History of Executive Functioning as a Theoretical and Clinical Construct.- Chapter 2. The Physiology of Executive Functioning.- Chapter 3. The Frontal Lobes and Executive Functioning.- Chapter 4. The Development of Hot and Cool Executive Function in Childhood and Adolescence: Are We Getting Warmer?.- SECTION II: PRACTICAL IMPLICATIONS.- Chapter 5. A Review of the Use of Executive Function Tasks in Externalizing and Internalizing Disorders.- Chapter 6. The Neuropsychology of Executive Functioning and the DSM-V.- Chapter 7. Executive [NAME] and ADHD.- Chapter 8. Executive [NAME] and Autism.- Chapter 9. Executive [NAME] as a Mediator of Age Related Cognitive Decline in Adults.- SECTION III: ASSESSMENT OF EXECUTIVE FUNCTIONING.- Chapter 10. Assessment of Executive Function Using Rating Scales: Psychometric Considerations.- Chapter 11. The Cambridge Neuropsychological Test Automated Battery in the Assessment of Executive Functioning.- Chapter 12. The Assessment of Executive Functioning Using the Cognitive Assessment System – Second Edition.- Chapter 13. The Assessment of Executive Functioning Using the Delis-Kaplan Executive Functions System (D-KEFS).- Chapter 14. Using the Comprehensive Executive Function Inventory (CEFI) to Assess Executive Function: From Theory to Application.- Chapter 15. The Assessment of Executive Functioning Using the Barkley Deficits in Executive Functioning Scales.- Chapter 16. Assessment of Executive Functioning with the Test of Verbal Conceptualization and Fluency (TVCF).- Chapter 17. Examining Executive Functioning Using the Behavior Assessment System for Children (BASC).- Chapter 18. The Assessment of Executive Functioning Using the Behavior Rating Inventory of Executive Functioning (BRIEF).- Chapter 19. The Assessment of Executive Functioning Using Tasks of Executive Control.- Chapter 20. The Assessment of Executive Functioning Using the Childhood Executive Functioning Inventory (CHEXI).- Chapter 21. The Assessment of Executive Functioning Using the Delis Rating of Executive Functions (D-REF).- Chapter 22. Cross Battery Approach to the Assessment of Executive Functioning.- SECTION IV: INTERVENTIONS RELATED TO EXECUTIVE FUNCTIONING.- Chapter 23. Treatment Integrity in Interventions that Target Executive Function.- Chapter 24. Interventions to Promote Executive Development in Children and Adolescents.- Chapter 25. Teaching Executive Functioning Processes:  [NAME], Strategy Use, and Effort.- Chapter 26. Working Memory Training and Cogmed to Enhance Executive Functioning.- Chapter 27. Supporting and Strengthening Working Memory in the Classroom to Enhance Executive Functioning.- Chapter 28. Building Executive Functioning in Children Through Problem Solving.- Chapter 29. Consulting with Teachers to Improve Student’s Executive Functioning. | Planning. Attention. Memory. Self-regulation. These and other core cognitive and behavioral operations of daily life comprise what we know as executive functioning (EF). But despite all we know, the concept has engendered multiple, often conflicting definitions, and its components are sometimes loosely defined and poorly understood.The Handbook of Executive Functioning cuts through the confusion, analyzing both the whole and its parts in comprehensive, practical detail for scholar and clinician alike. Background chapters examine influential models of EF, tour the brain geography of the executive system, and pose salient developmental questions. A section on practical implications relates early deficits in executive functioning to ADD and other disorders in children, and considers autism and later-life dementias from an EF standpoint. Further chapters weigh the merits of widely used instruments for assessing executive functioning and review interventions for its enhancement, with special emphasis on children and adolescents. Featured in the Handbook:The development of hot and cool executive function in childhood and adolescence.A review of the use of executive function tasks in externalizing and internalizing disorders.Executive functioning as a mediator of age-related cognitive decline in adults.Treatment integrity in interventions that target executive function.Supporting and strengthening working memory in the classroom to enhance executive functioning.The Handbook of Executive Functioning is an essential resource for researchers, scientist-practitioners, and graduate students in clinical child, school, and educational psychology; child and adolescent psychiatry; neurobiology; developmental psychology; rehabilitation medicine/therapy; and social work. | <p>Unites the theories of executive function with the means for assessment and treatment</p><p>Leading theorists in the field contribute chapters that outline their ideas and systematically review the supporting research</p><p>Examines executive functioning from conceptual and practical perspectives</p><p>Each chapter details current thinking, measurement, and interventions relative to executive functioning</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-7584-2 | Psychology | Hart | Shelley R Hart; [NAME]; [NAME] | Identifying, Assessing, and Treating Bipolar Disorder at School |  | Developmental Psychopathology at School |  | 1 | 2013 | 177 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 177 p. 9 illus. | 0 | final | 39.99 | 42.79 | 43.99 | 35.99 | 53.5 | English | Psychology | SCY12040 | Child and School Psychology | JMC | SCO00000 | Education (general) | JN | Psychology | Professional book | Springer US | In production | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction and Overview.- Etiology.- Prevalence and Associated Conditions.- Case Finding, Screening, and Referral.- Diagnostic Assessment.- Psycho-Educational Assessment.- Treatment of Bipolar Disorder in Children and Adolescents.- Appendix.- References. | Identifying, Assessing, and Treating Bipolar Disorder at School presents child and education practitioners with an evidence-based framework for accurate identification, assessment, and intervention of bipolar disorder. This straightforward resource clears up misconceptions about the condition, and outlines its complex presentation in young people, where it may appear in tandem with other disorders and bring challenges to treatment. By providing information to assist in referrals, consultations, and recommendations for special education, the authors give the reader a unique vantage point for improving students' learning environment and helping to facilitate the work of fellow professionals. Among the topics:Prevalence and associated conditions.Case finding, screening, and referrals.Diagnostic and psycho-educational assessmentTreatment of bipolar disorder in children and adolescents.Plus suggested resources to assist students and their families.Identifying, Assessing, and Treating Bipolar Disorder at School is an essential reference for school psychologists and allied educational professionals, special education teachers, speech and language therapists, counselors, clinical child psychologists, and mental health practitioners. | <p>Makes a significant contribution to the field by facilitating school practitioners' efforts to identify, assess, and treat bipolar disorder in students</p><p>Focuses directly on the challenges facing busy school-based mental health professionals</p><p>Includes concise statistics of key research findings and valuable guidance on how to apply them efficiently and effectively</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-8080-8 | Psychology | Hooper | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Models of Psychopathology | Generational Processes and Relational Roles |  |  | 1 | 2013 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 300 p. | 0 | approx. | 99.95 | 106.95 | 109.95 | 86.5 | 137 | English | Psychology | SCY12005 | Clinical Psychology | MMJ | [NAME] | Family | JHBK | Psychology | Monograph | Springer New York | Planned | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Introduction.- The Deadly Drama Triangle: A theoretical explanation.- Parentification.- Parental Alienation Syndrome.- Bullying.- The Stockholm Syndrome.- How to deal with these models promotionally, preventively, therapeutically, and rehabilitatively.- Conclusion. | This book explores current relational models of psychopathology that undergird a great many conflicts and destructive outcomes in family and intimate relationships. These models have similar features and can be considered as a group. They are all: (1) generational; (2) relational; and (3) fundamentally reactive processes stemming from existing psychopathology. | Focus will be on generational and relational processes rather than psychodynamic<br>Models have been greatly expanded and validated independently of each other<br>Models expand the concept of Relational Competence Theory | Science | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-3-319-00388-7 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME] | Depression and Drugs | The Neurobehavioral Structure of a Psychological Storm | SpringerBriefs in Psychology |  | 1 | 2013 | 92 | Soft cover | Book | XVII, 92 p. 8 illus. | 0 | final | 49.99 | 53.49 | 54.99 | 44.99 | 67 | English | Psychology | [NAME] | Neuropsychology | JMM | SCH53003 | Psychiatry | MMH | Psychology | Brief | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Uncovering the Interaction of Chemistry and Behavior in Depression: Dimensions vs. [NAME] in Structuring Research.- Depression is a “Storm” not a Lowering of Spirit: The Experience of the Severe Depressed State.- “Rashomon” and the Componential Approach to Developing Measures of Mood and Behavior.- Dimensions of Depression: The Conflictual Structure of the Depressed State.- False Assumptions: The Multidimensional Quality and its Relationships to Functioning of the Central Nervous System.- Testing New Hypotheses about Neurochemistry, Depression and Drugs.- Developing a More Effective and More Efficient Clinical Trial Model.- Elaboration of the New Theory of Depression and Conclusions.- Postscript.- [NAME] The Multivantaged (MV) Assessment Methods.- Appendix 2 The Video Interview Behavior Evaluation Scales (VIBES). | ​​​This book integrates the current state of knowledge on the association of neurochemical and psychological factors underlying the concept of depression or on the process and nature of the drug-induced changes that lead to recovery. Highlighting the results of two major multisite collaborative studies of the psychobiology of depression, the author demonstrates how more refined clinical methods uncover the initial behavioral actions of the drugs and chart the time course of their actions. The results disconfirm  earlier textbook reported findings that these actions are delayed for several weeks beyond the almost immediate neurochemical effects.  The “multivantaged” method makes possible distinguishing the clinical actions of different classes of antidepressant [NAME] ​ | <p>​Identifies the major psychological components of the clinically depressed state, emphasizing the dimensional aspects of its structure </p><p>Connects the psychological components with the associated dysfunctions in specific neurotransmitter systems to uncover the "neurobehavioral" foundation of the depressive disorder <br></p><p>Advances a new clinical method for measuring depression, the "multivantaged assessment (MV)"</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-7614-6 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Cultural Consultation | Encountering the Other in Mental Health Care | International and Cultural Psychology |  | 1 | 2013 | 384 | Hard cover | Book | XXVI, 384 p. 1 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Psychology | SCY20100 | Cross Cultural Psychology | JMH | SCY12005 | Clinical Psychology | MMJ | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: The Place of Culture in Mental Health Services.- Development and Evaluation of the Cultural Consultation Service.- The Process of Cultural Consultation.- Cultural Consultation in Child Psychiatry.- Working with Interpreters.- Culture Brokers, Clinically Applied Ethnography and Cultural Mediation.- Family Systems in Cultural Consultation.- Gender, Power & Ethnicity in Cultural Consultation.- Community Consultation and Mediation with Racialized and Marginalized Minorities.- Addressing Cultural Diversity Through Collaborative Care.- Consultation to Remote and Indigenous Communities.- Cultural Consultation for Refugees.- Consultation to Youth Protection and Legal Settings.- Cultural Consultation in General Hospital Psychiatry.- Cultural Consultations in Medical Settings.- Conclusion: The Future of Cultural Consultation. | Based on a recently completed project of cultural consultation in Montreal, Cultural Consultation presents a model of multicultural and applicable health care. This model used clinicians and consultants to provide in-depth assessment, treatment planning, and limited interventions in consultation with frontline primary care and mental health practitioners working with immigrants, refugees, and members of indigenous and ethnocultural communities. Evaluation of the service has demonstrated that focused interventions by consultants familiar with patients’ cultural backgrounds could improve the relationship between the patient and the primary clinician.  This volume presents models for intercultural work in psychiatry and psychology in primary care, general hospital and specialty mental health settings. The editors highlight crucial topics such as:  - Discussing the social context of intercultural mental health care, conceptual models of the role of culture in psychopathology and healing, and the development of a cultural consultation service and a specialized cultural psychiatric service - Examining the process of intercultural work more closely with particular emphasis oto strategies of consultation, the identity of the clinician, the ways in which gender and culture position the clinician, and and interaction of the consultant with family systems and larger institutions - Highlighting special situations that may place specific demands on the clinician: working with refugees and survivors of torture or political violence, with separated families, and with patients with psychotic episodes This book is of valuable use to mental health practitioners who are working in multidisciplinary settings who seek to understand cultural difference in complex cases. Psychiatrists, psychologists, social workers, nurse practitioners, primary care providers and trainees in these disciplines will make thorough use of the material covered in this text. | <p>More psychiatric in focus than the large number of works on cultural issues from counseling psychology, clinical psychology and social work</p><p>Emphasis on a consultation model (time-limited interventions) for primary care providers and case managers</p><p>Discusses and compares several models for developing and working with multidisciplinary teams</p><p>Strong emphasis on work with interpreters, culture brokers and community resources</p><p>Underscores the critical awareness of the cultural background of the clinician and the implicit culture of psychiatric knowledge and practice</p><p>The approach is focused more on systemic, contextual and political issues than on 'cultural' idiosyncrasies of the case, which are emphasized in some of the literature of medical anthropology</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-94-007-5048-7 | Psychology | Kluge | [NAME] | Skill and knowledge acquisition for complex technical tasks | A Human Factors Perspective on Learning Process and Training Design in High Reliability Organizations |  |  | 1 | 2013 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 200 p. | 0 | approx. | 99.95 | 106.95 | 109.95 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Psychology | [NAME] | Industrial and Organisational Psychology | JMJ | SCM26024 | Operations Research, Management Science | KJT | Psychology | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-17 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. Complex tasks: Description and occupations in which they can be found.- Chapter 2. Recquired knowledge and skills to perform complex tasks.- Chapter 3. Knowledge skills and their acquisition - Components of theoretical model.- Chapter 4. Supporting skill and knowledge acquisition in the High Reliability Organization.- References.-​ | This book provides the first comprehensive literature review on the acquisition and retention of complex skills in High Reliability Organizations. Based on this review, it introduces a theoretical model of how skill and knowledge acquisition for complex tasks is accomplished and shows how this model can be used to derive training methods and instructional techniques. Successful acquisition and retention of complex technical skills within High Reliability Organizations requires a full understanding of the learning process, knowledge structure, and skill requirements associated with the effective operation and management of technology. For researchers and for organizations, the understanding of these processes is vital for designing training programs as well as for reducing errors with severe consequences for human lives and the environment. Until now, only theoretical fragments exist on this topic, and only a very limited number of publications actually address complex tasks in vocational/occupational settings. “Skill and Knowledge Acquisition for Complex Tasks” uses its literature overview and theoretical model to formulate training principles, that can be used to develop training experiments for further empirical investigations as well as training methods for applied organizational contexts.  ​ | Introduces a new theoretical framework to understand the learning process of a complex task from a Human Factors perspective   Integrates theoretical approaches of individual skill acquisition and  adult learning into a new comprehensive framework for real-world tasks in control rooms of High Reliability Organizations (HROs)   [NAME] the gap between traditional learning theory and the training development for workers dealing with highly complex technical systems​ | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-7440-1 | Psychology | [NAME] | Baudewijntje [NAME]; [NAME]; Annelou L.C. de Vries | [NAME] and [NAME] | Progress in Care and Knowledge | Focus on Sexuality Research |  | 1 | 2014 | 357 | Hard cover | Book | XXXII, 357 p. 25 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Psychology | SCY20090 | Gender Studies | JMG | SCY20080 | Sexual Behavior | JMU | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer US | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I: Developmental principles.- Sex differentiation: Organizing hormone effects.- Genetic aspects of gender identity development and gender dysphoria.- Gender identity development, a biopsychosocial perspective.- Part II: Disorders of sex development.- The early care of the infant with a suspected disorder of sex development.- A noncategorical approach to the psychosocial care of persons with DSD and their families.- Psychosexual development in individuals with disorders of sex development (DSD).- Part III: Gender dysphoria.- Gender identity diagnosis: History and controversies.- Care for gender dysphoric children.- Models of psychopathology in children and adolescents with gender dysphoria.- Early medical intervention in adolescents with gender dysphoria.- Medical treatment for children with gender dysphoria: conceptual and ethical issues.- Care for adults with gender [NAME] comorbidity in adults with gender identity problems.- Sex reassignment: Endocrinological interventions in adults with gender [NAME] interventions for gender dysphoria.- The impact of stigma on transgender identity development and mental health.- Identity - An historical and political reflection. | This book provides a state of the art review on the care and treatment of and  current scientific knowledge on gender dysphoria (GD) and disorders of sex development (DSD). The book elucidates the history, the present situation, and the newest developments and future perspectives in both research on GD and DSD and the clinical management of individuals with [NAME] and DSD of all ages. With contributions from a selection of leading scientists and established clinicians in the field of GD and DSD, this is a unique and comprehensive book focusing on the etiology and developmental trajectories of GD and DSD regarding gender identity development, psychiatric comorbidity, classification dilemmas, ethical dilemmas in treatment, influences of societal stigmatization, and discussion of the medical and psychological implications and outcomes of treatment, and providing treatment guidelines for individuals with GD and DSD (distinct guidelines each for children, adolescents, and adults). By presenting not only an historic overview and the current state of the art, but also challenges for the future, the book aims to demonstrate the need for further research and to stimulate the development and improvement of the clinical care of individuals with GD and DSD.​ | <p>State of the art review of gender dysphoria (GD) and disorders of sex development (DSD) <br>First comprehensive review of GD and DSD in over a decade <br>Focus on scientific research and clinical achievements and challenges in this fast-developing field <br>Written by leading researchers and expert clinicians to honor pioneer [NAME] | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-6087-9 | Psychology | Leeming | [NAME] | Encyclopedia of Psychology and Religion |  |  |  | 2 | 2014 | 1500 | Hard cover | Book + Online Access | 1500 p. 100 illus. in color. Print + eReference. | 1 | final | 874 | 935.18 | 961.4 | 787 | 1163.5 | English | Psychology | SCY28000 | History of Psychology | PDX | SCV26000 | Religious Studies | HRA | Psychology | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer US | In production | 2013-09-01 00:00:00 |  |  |  | Encyclopedia of Psychology and Religion, 2nd edition, is a greatly expanded and updated reference work that builds on the foundation of the highly successful previous edition.   The first to integrate psychology and religion in the context of modern social and behavioral sciences, Encyclopedia of Psychology and Religion continues to offer a rich contribution to the development of human self-understanding.  A significant number of new entries and of updated original entries provide even more comprehensive coverage. This reference work provides a definitive and intellectually rigorous collection of psychological interpretations of the stories, rituals, motifs, symbols, doctrines, dogmas, and experiences of the world's religious and mythological traditions. A broad range of psychological approaches are used in order to help readers understand the form and content of religious experience as well as offer insight into the meanings of religious symbols and themes. It provides a technical and phenomenological vocabulary that will enable collaboration and dialogue among researchers in both fields. Easy to read and scrupulously edited, the encyclopedia draws from different religions, including modern world religions and older religious movements. It is of particular interest to researchers and professionals in psychology and religion. | First to integrate psychology and religion in the context of modern social and behavioral sciences <br>This 2nd edition continues to offer a rich contribution to the development of human self-understanding <br>Provides a comprehensive collection of psychological interpretations of the world's religious and mythological traditions | Science | Reduced (3) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-6085-5 | Psychology | Leeming | [NAME] | Encyclopedia of Psychology and Religion |  |  |  | 2 | 2014 | 1500 | Hard cover | Book | 1500 p. 100 illus. in color. In 3 volumes, not available separately. | 1 | final | 699 | 747.93 | 768.9 | 629.5 | 931 | English | Psychology | SCY28000 | History of Psychology | PDX | SCV26000 | Religious Studies | HRA | Psychology | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer US | In production | 2013-09-01 00:00:00 |  |  |  | Encyclopedia of Psychology and Religion, 2nd edition, is a greatly expanded and updated reference work that builds on the foundation of the highly successful previous edition.   The first to integrate psychology and religion in the context of modern social and behavioral sciences, Encyclopedia of Psychology and Religion continues to offer a rich contribution to the development of human self-understanding.  A significant number of new entries and of updated original entries provide even more comprehensive coverage. This reference work provides a definitive and intellectually rigorous collection of psychological interpretations of the stories, rituals, motifs, symbols, doctrines, dogmas, and experiences of the world's religious and mythological traditions. A broad range of psychological approaches are used in order to help readers understand the form and content of religious experience as well as offer insight into the meanings of religious symbols and themes. It provides a technical and phenomenological vocabulary that will enable collaboration and dialogue among researchers in both fields. Easy to read and scrupulously edited, the encyclopedia draws from different religions, including modern world religions and older religious movements. It is of particular interest to researchers and professionals in psychology and religion. | First to integrate psychology and religion in the context of modern social and behavioral sciences <br>This 2nd edition continues to offer a rich contribution to the development of human self-understanding <br>Provides a comprehensive collection of psychological interpretations of the world's religious and mythological traditions | Science | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-6086-2 | Psychology | Leeming | [NAME] | Encyclopedia of Psychology and Religion |  |  |  | 2 | 2014 | 1500 |  | eReference work | 1500 p. 100 illus. in color. eReference. | 1 | final | 699 | 831.81 | 838.8 | 629.5 | 978 | English | Psychology | SCY28000 | History of Psychology | PDX | SCV26000 | Religious Studies | HRA | Psychology | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer US | In production | 2013-09-01 00:00:00 |  |  |  | Encyclopedia of Psychology and Religion, 2nd edition, is a greatly expanded and updated reference work that builds on the foundation of the highly successful previous edition.   The first to integrate psychology and religion in the context of modern social and behavioral sciences, Encyclopedia of Psychology and Religion continues to offer a rich contribution to the development of human self-understanding.  A significant number of new entries and of updated original entries provide even more comprehensive coverage. This reference work provides a definitive and intellectually rigorous collection of psychological interpretations of the stories, rituals, motifs, symbols, doctrines, dogmas, and experiences of the world's religious and mythological traditions. A broad range of psychological approaches are used in order to help readers understand the form and content of religious experience as well as offer insight into the meanings of religious symbols and themes. It provides a technical and phenomenological vocabulary that will enable collaboration and dialogue among researchers in both fields. Easy to read and scrupulously edited, the encyclopedia draws from different religions, including modern world religions and older religious movements. It is of particular interest to researchers and professionals in psychology and religion. | First to integrate psychology and religion in the context of modern social and behavioral sciences <br>This 2nd edition continues to offer a rich contribution to the development of human self-understanding <br>Provides a comprehensive collection of psychological interpretations of the world's religious and mythological traditions | Science | E-book | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-7177-6 | Psychology | Morewitz | [NAME]; [NAME] | Handbook of Forensic Sociology and Psychology |  |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 464 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 464 p. 11 illus. | 0 | final | 169.99 | 181.89 | 186.99 | 153 | 226.5 | English | Psychology | SCY34000 | Law and Psychology | JMK | SCX22000 | Sociology, general | JHB | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Evolving Practice Parameters of Forensic Criminology.- The Work of the Sociologist as Mitigation Expert in Cases of Violent Crime.- “Oh, Stop That Cursed Jury”: The Role of the Forensic Psychologist in the Mitigation Phase of the Death Penalty Trial.- The Problem of Interrogation-Induced False Confession: Sources of Failure in Prevention and Detention.- ‘Brainwashing’ as Forensic Evidence.- Target Selection by Criminal Groups and Gangs.- Gangs in the Workplace.-  The Role of a Gang Expert in Court.-Competence to Proceed and Juvenile Courts.- Competency Evaluations for Adult Defendants.- Neuropsychological Evaluations of Hispanics.- Sociological Testimony in [NAME] and Education-Related Litigation.- Preventing Workplace Violence and Litigation through Pre-Employment Screening and Enforcement of Workplace Conduct Expectations.- Critical Issues in the Evolving Diagnosis of PTSD.- Sociological Evidence in Suicide Litigation.- Sociological Data in Malpractice Lawsuits.- Sociological Testimony in Long-Term Care Litigation.- Sociological Testimony and Evidence in Product Liability Litigation.- Sociological Evidence in Human Factors-Related Litigation.- Sociological Testimony in Alcohol- and Other Drug-Associated Litigation.- Sociological Theory and Methods in Toxic Tort Lawsuits.- Child Custody Evaluations.- Parental Alienation.- Anger.- Forensic Evaluation of Child Abuse.- Sociological Evidence in Abuse Litigation.- Using Expert Witnesses in Immigration Hearings/ Court.- Forensic Sociology: The Case of Honor Killing in the Muslim World.- Courting Media: Mass Media Studies of Immigration Courts.- Sociological Evidence in Military Courts- Martial Pertaining to War Crimes.- [NAME]! Socio-Legal Studies, Courts-Martial, and the U.S. Military.- Appendix A - History of Radiation Processing, Contamination, and Environmental Clean-up Efforts. | The role of behavioral and social sciences in the courtroom setting has expanded exponentially in the past few decades.  It is now widely recognized that scientists in these areas provide critical contextual information for legal decision making, and that there is a reliable knowledge base for doing so.  While there are many handbooks of forensic psychology, this is the first such volume to incorporate sociological findings, broadening the conceptual basis for examining cases in both the civil and criminal realms, including immigration issues, personal injury, child custody, and sexual harassment.   This volume will examine the responsibilities of expert witnesses and consultants, and how they may utilize principles, theories and methods from both sociology and psychology.  It will show these disciplines together can improve the identification and apprehension of criminals, as well as enhance the administration  of justice by clarifying profiles of criminal behavior, particularly in cases of serial killers, death threat makers, stalkers, and kidnappers.  The volume is quite comprehensive, covering a range of medical, school, environmental and business settings.  Throughout it links basic ideas to real applications and their impact on the justice system. | First title to connect forensic sociology to forensic psychology <br>Covers principles, methods, and applications<br>Comprehensive coverage across settings | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-7390-9 | Psychology | Mustakova-Possardt | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Toward a Socially Responsible Psychology for a Global Era |  | International and Cultural Psychology |  | 1 | 2013 | 288 | Hard cover | Book | XXI, 288 p. 5 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Psychology | SCY20100 | Cross Cultural Psychology | JMH | SCX18000 | Political Science, general | JPA | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I: Central dimensions of rethinking a socially responsible psychology for a global era.- Focusing psychology on the global challenge: Achieving a sustainable future.- Psychology, Culture and a Global Perspective.- Key Global Documents that Provide the Ethical Underpinnings and Guiding Moral Vision for This Volume.- A Vision of Psychology in an Explicit Normative Context.-  Toward a Psychological Science of Globalization, A Global Community Psychology.- Transforming a limited social function into a viable global action agenda.- A Historical Perspective.- Guiding Prevalent Assumptions and Contemporary Psychology.- Psychological Impact of Prevailing and Unexamined Guiding Assumptions.- Beyond Prevailing Assumptions: Developing a Global Action Agenda.- Practices of Psychological Inquiry: The Global Challenge.- From Empiricist Foundations to Social Epistemology.- Socially Responsible Inquiry.- Psychology and Global Impact: A Collective Delusion?.- In Conclusion: Recommendations.- Toward socially responsible clinical practice suited to the needs of global community.- Global Community Psychology: Becoming Counselors of the World.- Central Values and Priorities Underlying Current Western Clinical Training and Practice.- Morality, Moral Relativism, and Psychotherapy.- [NAME] and the Cost of War.- Tension Between Current Clinical Values and Priorities and the Core Values Articulated in the UDHR and the Earth Charter.- Some Recent Developments Toward Global Maturity in Clinical Practice.- Systemic and Policy Shifts Needed to Enhance Social and Global Responsibility in Clinical Practice.- Conclusion and Recommendations.- Toward Social Health for a Global Community.-Parallel Global Processes: Fragmentation of Human Consciousness and Society, and Global Unification Around Issues of Social Justice.- Early Understanding of Social Health.- First Systemic Approach to Social Health: Erich Fromm.- Toward a Complex Systems Approach to Social Health.- The Need for Balance of Love, Reason, and Faith in Human Affairs.- Emerging Possible Early Definition of Social Health.- Social Health As A Process of Unity in Diversity.- Summary and Conclusions.- Toward Cultivating Socially Responsible Global Consciousness.- Developmental Reconstructions of Self-Identity.- Consciousness as a Focal Point of Psychological Study.- Centrality of Moral Character and Choice in Development.- Further Role for Psychology and Psychologists in Promoting the Growth and Transformation of Consciousness.- Part II: Pressing Global Issues.- Toward a Psychology of Nonviolence.- Definitions.- Ontological Assumptions.- Effectiveness vs. Fruitfulness of Nonviolent Civil Resistance.- Psychology and the Military.- A Conceptual Framework.- Future Psychological Directions.- Toward Racial Justice.- The Racial Perceptual Divide.- The Racial Reality of Policing Practices.- The Criminal In-Justice System.- Contemporary Racism.- The Sociopolitical Context.- Moving Toward Equity and Justice.- Recommendations.- Overcoming Discrimination, Persecution, and Violence Against Women.- Oppression.- The Relational Self.- Challenging Silence: The Importance of Counter-Narratives to Gender Ideologies.- Conclusions and Further Recommendations.- Poor People, Poor Planet: The Psychology of How We Harm and Heal Hummanity and Earth.- The Role of Psychological Processes in Economic Justice and [NAME] Sustainability.- The Centrality of Poverty in Economic Growth, Environmental Decline, and Community Suffering.- The Moral, Psychological and Environmental Dilemma of Poverty.- Changing the Structures Underlying Poverty and Environmental Harm.- What Psychology Can Do to Deter Our Harmful Ways.- Where There is Psychology is There Hope?.- Processes in the Development of Individual and [NAME] and the Role of Religious and Spiritual Communities.- Socially Responsible Psychology | This book explores the concept of “socially-responsible psychology in a global age” and how it might be used to organize, integrate and bring enhanced focus a field that has the potential to contribute to solutions to the world’s most pressing problems. In this volume, the editors explore the central and defining features of socially-responsible psychology, challenges that this work would face, and the mechanisms and processes by which psychological work could be synergistically integrated with the work of other disciplines.  For this purpose, the volume also examines a variety of factors currently that limit psychology in carrying out this goal. | Defines the concept of socially-responsible psychology <br>Provides a multi-layer analysis of social health, as separate from peace psychology <br>Basic issues for creating social responsibility &amp; ethics courses in psychology | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-3-319-00244-6 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Practitioner's Guide to Empirically Supported Measures of Anger, [NAME], and Violence |  | ABCT Clinical Assessment Series |  | 1 | 2013 | 392 | Soft cover | Book | XLV, 392 p. 118 illus. | 0 | final | 79.99 | 85.59 | 87.99 | 72 | 106.5 | English | Psychology | SCY12005 | Clinical Psychology | MMJ | [NAME] | Psychotherapy and Counseling | MMJT | Psychology | Professional book | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I: General issues in assessing anger, aggression, and violence.- Introduction.- Assessing anger, aggression, and violence.- Part II.- Assessment instruments.- Measures of anger.- Measures of aggression.- Measures of violence.- Part III: Reprinted measures. | ​​This book contains three sections. Part I includes an introductory chapter and an applied chapter on conducting a risk assessment.  Part II provides a description of how the measures were organized and quick-view tables that provide easy access to measures with enough information to allow for an estimate of the likelihood that reading additional information about a particular measure would prove fruitful.  Measures are organized alphabetically into tables for measures of anger, aggression, or violence.  Each of the tables provides the name of the measure, the purpose for which the measure was developed, and the targeted population.  The tables also provide information on the method of assessment, the amount of time required to use the measure, and the page number where additional information is available.  Part II also contains the review of each measure.  Part III provides examples of measures that can be copied for research or clinical purposes.        ​ | <p>This book reviews over 130 methods of anger, aggression, or violence <br>Part I includes an applied chapter on conducting a risk assessment<br>Part II provides a description of how measures are organized  <br>Part III provides examples of measures that can be copies for research or clinical purposes</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-8384-7 | Psychology | Rush | [NAME]; Olivera Simić | The Arts of Transitional Justice | Culture, Activism, and Memory after Atrocity | Springer Series in Transitional Justice | 6 | 1 | 2014 | 22 | Hard cover | Book | CCXCIV, 22 p. 10 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Psychology | SCY20100 | Cross Cultural Psychology | JMH | SCX18040 | International Relations | JPS | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | ​​​The Demands of Art in Transitional Justice Processes.-   Dispersed Memories:  Diaspora, Reconciliation and Healing.-  Activism, Public Debate and Temporal Complexities in Fighting for Transitional Justice in Serbia.- Aesthetic Approaches to Justice: Addressing Jedwabne.- Theatre and Justice: A Grassroots Approach to Transitional Justice in Afghanistan.-  You are allowed (to be alive!) How art can give permission.- The Visions of Literary Justice for Survivors of Srebrenica: Examining the Fictional Narratives of Srebrenica Genocide in Light of the Insights from Transitional Justice.-  Frames of Genocide: Between performativity and aesthetics, memorials and archives in the Transitional Justice Process in Rwanda.- The Artistic Imaginary and Transitional Justice in Northern Ireland.- The Staging of History in Cambodia.- On the Transformation of Wounds: Pictures as an engine of justice.-  Memorial Culture in the former Yugoslavia: The Mothers of Srebenica and the destruction of artefacts by the ICTY.- The plural jurisdictions of transitional aesthetics: bearing witness in liminal spaces.​ | ​​The Art of Transitional Justice examines the relationship between transitional justice and the practices of art associated with it. Art, which includes theater, literature, photography, and film, has been integral to the understanding of the issues faced in situations of transitional justice as well as other issues arising out of conflict and mass atrocity. The chapters in this volume take up this understanding and its demands of transitional justice in situations in several countries: Afghanistan, Serbia, Srebenica, Rwanda, Northern Ireland, Cambodia, as well as the experiences of resulting diasporic communities. In doing so, it brings to bear the insights from scholars, civil society groups, and art practitioners, as well as interdisciplinary collaborations. | <p>Examines the relationship between transitional justice and the practice of art</p><p>Collaborative work between scholars, civil society groups, and artists</p><p>Interdisciplinary focus on the central themes of transitional justice</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | [PHONE]-53-6 | Psychology | SHEK | [NAME]; [NAME] | Development and Evaluation of Positive Adolescent Training through Holistic Social Programs (P.A.T.H.S.) |  | Quality of Life in Asia | 3 | 1 | 2013 | 319 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 319 p. 33 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Psychology | SCY44000 | Positive Psychology | [NAME] | SCY12040 | Child and School Psychology | JMC | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer Singapore | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- 1 Adolescent developmental issues in Hong Kong: Phenomena and implications for youth service.- 2 Conceptual framework underlying the development of a positive youth development program in Hong Kong.- 3 Development of a positive youth development program in Hong Kong.- 4 Evaluation of the Project P.A.T.H.S. using multiple evaluation strategies.- 5 Objective outcome evaluation of the Project P.A.T.H.S.: Longitudinal study based on indicators of positive youth development.- 6.Impact of the Project P.A.T.H.S. on adolescent risk behavior: A five-year longitudinal study.- 7 Subjective outcome evaluation based on the program participants: Does dosage matter?.- 8 Subjective outcome evaluation based on the perceptions of the program implementers.- 9 Subjective Outcome Evaluation of the Project P.A.T.H.S.:Secondary analyses of the qualitative data collected from program implementers.- 10 Interim evaluation of Project P.A.T.H.S.:An integration of findings based on program implementers.- 11 Qualitative evaluation of the Project P.A.T.H.S.:Narrative findings based on focus groups with participating students.- 12 Qualitative findings derived from focus groupsbased on the program implementers.- 13 Evaluation based on weekly diaries written by the students.- 14 Evaluation based on personal construct psychology:Findings based on the repertory grid test.- 15 Process evaluation of the Project P.A.T.H.S. in Hong Kong.- 16 Using different programs to help adolescents withgreater psychosocial needs.- 17 Lessons learned, emergent issues, and future directions.- 18 Development of a positive youth development subject in a university context.- 19 Impact of the Project P.A.T.H.S. in China.- 20 Evidence-based positive youth development programs: Insights from the Project P.A.T.H.S. | This book outlines the development, implementation and evaluation of a project entitled “P.A.T.H.S. to Adulthood: A Jockey Club Youth Enhancement Scheme,' with P.A.T.H.S. denoting Positive [NAME] through Holistic Social programmes. This pioneer project was conducted in Hong Kong between 2005 and 2012 with more than 210,000 participants. Its goal was to help students meet various challenges in their path to adulthood, with a focus on their psychosocial competencies, developmental assets and the promotion of healthy peer relationships. The project was initiated by The Hong Kong Jockey Club Charities Trust in collaboration with the Government’s Social Welfare Department, Education Bureau and five universities in Hong Kong. Edited by the researchers of the project, Development and Evaluation of Positive Adolescent Training through Holistic Social Programs explores the nature of positive youth development (PYD), the application of PYD constructs to youth programs and implementation issues.Using multiple strategies, the book evaluates the overall effectiveness of the P.A.T.H.S. school-based programme and reveals that stakeholders had positive perceptions of the project, its implementers and benefits. Students in the program showed better positive development and displayed lower levels of substance abuse and delinquent behaviour than students in the control schools. The book also details lessons learned, emergent issues, future directions as well as insights into the development of positive youth development programs particularly in Chinese communities. Development and Evaluation of Positive Adolescent Training through Holistic Social Programs will appeal to all educators, administrators, psychologists, social workers and allied profeesionals looking to promote whole-person development in their students, especially those with in interest in education in China. | <p>Offers a scientific evaluation of a landmark positive youth development project conducted in Hong Kong between 2005 and 2012 that had more than 210,000 participants</p><p>Evaluates the overall effectiveness of the P.A.T.H.S. school-based programme and reveals that stakeholders had positive perceptions of the project, its implementers and benefits</p><p>Details lessons learned, emergent issues, future directions, as well as insights into the development of positive youth development programs particularly in Chinese communities</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-8171-3 | Psychology | Sharp | [NAME] | Justice and Economic Violence in Transition |  | Springer Series in Transitional Justice | 5 | 1 | 2014 | 547 | Hard cover | Book | IX, 547 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Psychology | SCY20100 | Cross Cultural Psychology | JMH | SCW12014 | Development Economics | KCM | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | ​​​Addressing Economic Violence Through Transitional Justice as Transition to Positive Peace.- Economic Violence and Liberal Peacebuilding.- “It’s the Economy, Stupid;” Economic Violence and Violent Conflict.- Economic Violence in the Practice of Truth Commissions.- Reparations   and Economic and Social Rights after Violent Conflict.- Corruption and Transitional Justice.-  Where does “Transitional Justice” End and “Development” Begin?- Transitional Justice and   Natural Resources.- Foreign Investment and Economic Governance in Transitions.- Transitional Justice and Land Tenure Reform.- Conclusion: From Periphery to Foreground;Where Does Policy Go From Here.​ | ​​​​This book examines the role of economic violence (violations of economic and social rights, corruption, and plunder of natural resources) within the transitional justice agenda. Because   economic violence often leads to conflict, is perpetrated during conflict, and continues afterwards as a legacy of conflict, a greater focus on economic and social rights issues in the transitional justice context is critical. One might add that insofar as transitional justice is increasingly seen as an instrument of peacebuilding rather than a simple political transition, focus on economic violence as the crucial “root cause” is key to preventing re-lapse into conflict.   Recent increasing attention to economic issues by academics and truth commissions suggest this may be slowly changing, and that economic and social rights may represent the “next frontier” of transitional justice concerns. There remain difficult questions that have yet to be worked out at the level of theory, policy, and practice. Further scholarship in this regard is both timely, and necessary. This volume therefore presents an opportunity to fill an important gap. The project will bring together new papers by recognized and emerging scholars and policy experts in the field.​ | <p>Explores innovative research at the intersection of peacework and economics</p><p>Assesses important international policy shifts </p><p>Focuses on a critical emerging topic in the area of transitional justice​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-7490-6 | Psychology | Spini | [NAME]; [NAME]; Dinka [NAME] | War, Community, and Social Change | Collective Experiences in the Former Yugoslavia | Peace Psychology Book Series | 17 | 1 | 2013 | 419 | Hard cover | Book | I, 419 p. 24 illus., 6 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Psychology | SCY20100 | Cross Cultural Psychology | JMH | SCX18040 | International Relations | JPS | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | ​​​​​Collective experiences in the former Yugoslavia:a societal psychology approach.- Collective experiences and collective memories: writing the history of crisis, wars, and the ‘balkanisation of Yugoslavia’.- Ethnic intolerance, a product rather than a cause of war: Revisiting the state of the art.- The demise of mixed marriage? A cross-generational outlook on ethnic boundaries between families.- The destruction of multiethnic locations: Markers of identity and the determinants of residential trajectories.- Compliance and resistance to the logic of ethnic conflict during the siege of Sarajevo.- Beyond ethnic intolerance: traces and benefits of ethnic diversity in post-war Bosnia-Herzegovina.- From collective victimhood to social reconstruction: Outlining a conceptual framework.- Declared enemies: Personal and social logics of collective guilt assignment.- When nobody stood up and everybody is guilty: a puzzle of individual responsibility and collective guilt.- Threatened powers: When blaming “the others” grows out of internal instability and protest.- Shattered beliefs: How to cope when the world is not a just place .- Beyond collective denial: Public reactions to human rights violations and the struggle over the moral continuity of communities.- War and community: What have we learned about their inter-relations?. | Collective experiences in the former Yugoslavia documents and analyses how social representations and practices are shaped by collective violence in a context of ethnic discourse. What are the effects of violence and what are the effects of collectively experienced victimisation on societal norms, attitudes and collective beliefs? This volume stresses that mass violence has a de- and re-structuring role for manifold psychosocial processes. A combined psychosocial approach draws attention to how most people in the former Yugoslavia had to endure and cope with war and dramatic societal changes and how they resisted and overcame ethnic rivalry, violence and segregation. It is a departure from the mindset that depict most people in the former Yugoslavia as either blind followers of ethnic war entrepreneurs or as intrinsically motivated for violence by deep-rooted intra-ethnic loyalties and inter-ethnic animosities. | <p>Contains 'voices' section that are primary source accounts of the war in the former Yugoslavia</p><p>Provides diverse research perspectives on the effects of collective violence on communities</p><p>Explores interdisciplinary approaches to helping communities deal with the aftermath of war and trauma</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-94-007-7185-7 | Psychology | Stelter | Reinhard Stelter | A Guide to Third Generation Coaching | Narrative-Collaborative Theory and Practice |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 230 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 230 p. 13 illus., 9 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 49.99 | 53.49 | 54.99 | 44.99 | 67 | English | Psychology | SCY20120 | Consulting - Supervision - Coaching | JM | SCW23260 | Careers in Business and Mangagement | KC | Psychology | Professional book | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  | English language distribution rights only | About the author.- Preface.- Acknowledgements.- CHAPTER 1: Introduction.- 1.1. The breakdown of the knowledge monopoly.- 1.2. The need for a new coaching concept.- 1.3. What is coaching?.- 1.4. The goal and structure of the book.- CHAPTER 2: The origins and development of coaching.- 2.1. Societal legitimacy: coaching as an answer to late- and post-modern challenges.- 2.2. Coaching, identity and self-constructions: The self is at stake in the coaching dialogue.- 2.3. Coaching and learning – between personal experience and collaboration.- 2.4. Coaching in the perspective of organization and management theory.- 2.5. Closing remarks.- CHAPTER 3: Intervention theories in coaching and coaching psychology.- 3.1. Coaching as a special dialogue form.- 3.2. Basic intentions in the coaching conversation.- 3.3. The coach’s basic stance.- 3.4. Basic theories and their role in coaching.- 3.5. Additional theories.- 3.6. Closing remarks.- CHAPTER 4: Narrative collaborative coaching – theory and practice.- 4.1. Why coaching as a narrative collaborative practice?.- 4.2. Epistemological basis – bridging the gap between phenomenology and social constructionism.- 4.3. Narrative collaborative practice in coaching.- 4.4. Closing remarks.- CHAPTER 5: Case studies and effect studies of coaching as a narrative collaborative practice.- 5.1. Case studies of my own practice.- 5.2. Perceived effect – a narrative analysis.- 5.3. Statistical effect – social recovery and well-being as the main outcomes.- 5.4. Conclusion in relation to the research project.- 5.5. Closing remarks.- CHAPTER 6: Professional practice between research, knowledge and reflection.- 6.1 Evidence-based practice and practice-based evidence.- 6.2 The knowledge base of coaching [NAME] knowledge, practice and profession.- 6.4 Knowledge between fact and intuition.- CHAPTER 7: Reflective practice among coaching experts.- 7.1. Peter.- 7.2. Steven.- 7.3. Kathrine.- 7.4. Martha.- 7.5. Reflections on practitioner reflections.- 7.6. Afterthoughts.- CHAPTER 8: In conclusion.- REFERENCES.- INDEX. | This book proposes third generation coaching in a form where the coach and the coaches are less concerned with solutions and more concerned with creating space for (self-)reflection through collaborative practices. Offering a revisited and innovative approach to coaching psychology, advantageous for learners and practitioners alike. It marks a new trend in coaching and has a special profile, based on the acknowledgement of changes in society, learning and knowledge production, as well as leadership.   The author’ s concept of ​​coaching distinguishes itself from  the existing models (pop coaching , GROW model, etc) by offering a fresh analysis of our society – a society that is characterised by diversification, identity challenges, abolition of the monopoly of knowledge, lifelong learning, the necessity for self-reflection, etc. These societal changes are the basis for the existence of coaching and its prevalence, but they must also be the foundation for the way we employ coaching. | <p>Introduces a new conceptual framework for coaching practice </p><p>Unique approach connects coaching to societal changes in society, work and life </p><p>Strong focus on the importance of values and meaning in the coaching process </p><p>Provides excellent material for ambitious practitioners and high level coaching education programs by supporting the reader as a reflective practitioner </p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-8249-9 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME] | Handbook of Psychopathology in Intellectual Disability | Research, Practice, and Policy | Autism and Child Psychopathology Series |  | 1 | 2014 | 872 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 872 p. 3 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 249 | 266.43 | 273.9 | 224.5 | 331.5 | English | Psychology | SCY12005 | Clinical Psychology | MMJ | SCH53003 | Psychiatry | MMH | Psychology | Handbook | Springer New York | In production | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Section 1. General Issues & Assessment of Psychopathology.- Chapter1. Introduction.- Chapter 2. Epidemiology.- Chapter 3. Principles of Clinical Assessment.- Chapter 4. Assessment Instruments.- Chapter 5. Classification and Diagnostic Systems.- Section 2. Aetiological Approaches.- Chapter 6. Neuroimaging.- Chapter 7. Epilepsy.- Chapter 8. Behavioural Phenotypes/Genetic Syndromes.- Chapter 9.  Psychological and Social Factors.- Section 3. Co-morbid Psychopathology.- Chapter 10. [NAME] 11. Mood & Anxiety Disorders.- Chapter 12. Personality Disorders.- Chapter 13. Dementia.- Chapter 14. Substance Misuse.- Section 4. [NAME]. Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder (ADHD).- Chapter 16. Autism Spectrum Disorders.- Chapter 17. Behaviour Problems & Psychopathology.- Chapter 18. Forensic & Offending Behaviours.- Section 5. Interventions and Services.- Chapter 19. Psychopharmacology.- Chapter 20. Psychological Treatments.- Chapter 21. Community Mental Health Services.- Chapter 22. Impatient Mental Health Services.- Section 6. Future Directions.- Chapter 23. Psychopathology in Intellectual Disability: Future Directions in Research and Evidence-Based Practice. | The complex intersecting of genetic, biological, and environmental factors can make intellectual impairments difficult for clinicians to assess and treat. When such comorbid conditions as substance abuse or bipolar disorder are part of the equation, so are increased risks for clinical uncertainties and therapeutic dead-ends.The Handbook of Psychopathology in Intellectual Disability reflects the diversity of its subject in prevalence and presentation, testing methods and treatment options. Besides focusing on specific pathologies as they affect the course of intellectual disability (ID), its coverage spans the field from in-depth analyses of psychosocial aspects of ID to promising new findings in genetics and the ongoing challenge of providing personalized care tailored to individual client needs. Expert contributors bridge gaps between the evidence base and best practices and improved policy for maximum utility. In addition, chapters are written to benefit the widest variety of professionals treating clients with ID across disciplines. Key areas featured in the [NAME] include:General issues and assessment methods.Core etiological approaches, including neuroimaging.Comorbid psychopathology, including mood, anxiety, and personality disorders.Common clinical conditions, such as ADHD, autism, and behavior problems.Medical and psychological interventions as well as community and inpatient services.Future directions in research and evidence-based practices.The Handbook of Psychopathology in Intellectual Disability is an essential reference for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians and other scientist-practitioners in clinical psychology, psychiatry, social work, rehabilitation medicine, public health, and neuropsychology. | Examines the complexities of both etiology and manifestation of psychopathology in people with intellectual disabilities<br><br>Addresses issues of broad-based mental health service delivery for people with intellectual disabilities<br><br>Describes assessments and interventions based on a comprehensive overview of the current evidence base<br><br>Explores future directions in research and its implications for clinical practice | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-7623-8 | Psychology | Weist | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Handbook of School Mental Health | Research, Training, Practice, and Policy | Issues in Clinical Child Psychology |  | 2 | 2013 | 485 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 485 p. 24 illus., 6 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 249 | 266.43 | 273.9 | 224.5 | 331.5 | English | Psychology | SCY12040 | Child and School Psychology | JMC | SCO39000 | Educational Psychology | JNC | Psychology | Handbook | Springer US | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Commentary 1; Hill Walker.- Commentary 2; Lucille Eber.- Commentary 3; Kathy Short.- Commentary 4; [NAME] and [NAME] Hamm.- Chapter 1. Introduction: Further Advancing the Field of School Mental Health; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME]: Funding, Training, and [NAME] Collaboration.- Chapter 2.  Funding Expanded School Mental Health Programs; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Stephan.- Chapter 3. Preparing School Mental Health Professionals: Competencies in Interdisciplinary and Cross-Systems Collaboration; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Chapter 4. Pre-service Training for School Mental Health Clinicians; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Weist.- Chapter 5. Effective School Teams: Benefits, Barriers, and Best Practices; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] 6. Advancing School Mental Health in Montana: Partnership, Research, and Policy; [NAME], [NAME], Carol Ewen.- Chapter 7.  [NAME]: The Role of Expanded School Mental Health in Supporting Students with Emotional and Behavioral Difficulties in the Least Restrictive Environment; [NAME], [NAME] Cunningham.- Section II. Prevention and Mental Health Promotion.- Chapter 8. The Integration of Positive Behavioral Interventions and Supports and Social and Emotional Learning; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] 9. Promoting Mental Health in Early Childhood Programs: Serving Low-income Ethnic Minority Families; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Harrison.- Chapter 10. [NAME] and Behavioral Health in At-risk Youth: Implementation and Efficacy of Primary and Secondary Prevention Programs in Schools; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME]  11. Effects of Trauma on Students: Early Intervention through Cognitive Behavioral Intervention for Trauma in Schools; Erum Nadeem, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Bradley D. Stein.- Chapter 12. The Connection Between Out-of-School Time Programs and School Mental Health; [NAME], [NAME] Chapter 13. Better Understanding and Intervening to Prevent Relational Aggression; [NAME], Tracy Evian Waasdorp, [NAME], [NAME]. Youth and Family Engagement and Empowerment.- Chapter 14. Partnering with Youth in School Mental Health: Recommendations from Students; [NAME], [NAME], Emily Mancil, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Weist.- Chapter 15. Strengthening the Components and Processes of Family Involvement in School Mental Health; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Weist.- Chapter 16. [NAME]; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Cox.- Chapter 17. Increasing Parental Engagement in School-based Interventions using Team Engagement and Motivation Methods; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] 18. Lessons Learned from Scaling-up the Ecological Approach to Family Interventions and Treatment Program in Middle Schools; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Strycker.- Section IV. Coaching and Consultation.- Chapter 19. | With so few therapeutic outlets readily available to young people, schools have evolved into mental health centers for many students. Yet schools are hampered by limited access to resources needed to provide mental health promotion, prevention, and intervention services.Like its acclaimed predecessor, the Second Edition of the Handbook of School Mental Health offers ways for professionals to maximize resources, make and strengthen valuable connections, and attain more effective school-based services and programming. At the same time, the [NAME] provides strategies and recommendations in critical areas, such as workforce development, interdisciplinary collaborations, youth/family engagement, consultation, funding, and policy concerns, summarizes the state of current research, and offers directions for further study. Chapters model best practices for promoting wellness and safety, early detection of emotional and behavioral problems, and school-based interventions for students with anxiety, depression, attention deficit hyperactivity disorder, and other common challenges. In spotlighting this range of issues, the contributors have created a comprehensive game plan for advancing the field. Among the [NAME]'s topics:Pre-service training for school mental health clinicians.Cognitive-behavioral interventions for trauma in schools. Increasing parental engagement in school-based interventions.Models of psychiatric consultation to schools.Culturally competent behavioral and emotional screening. Bullying from a school mental health perspective.Prevention and intervention strategies related to a variety of mental health problems in schools. The Second Edition of the Handbook of School Mental Health is an essential reference for researchers, graduate students, and other professionals in child and school psychology, special and general education, public health, school nursing, occupational therapy, psychiatry, social work and counseling, educational policy, and family advocacy. | <p>Provides an updated, expanded, and in-depth examination of the latest developments in school mental health research, training, practice, and policy</p><p>Explores the public health issues of school mental health as well as the developmental trajectories affecting the behavioral and academic performances of students</p><p>Addresses the diverse and unique needs of schools and how to effectively train all mental health and school professionals</p><p>Focuses on enhancing collaborative approaches among the various individual, group, system, and agency stakeholders</p><p>Explores how to facilitate evidence-based practices in the school setting</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4614-7402-9 | Psychology | Wiener | [NAME]; [NAME] | Problem Solving Courts | Social Science and Legal Perspectives |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 413 | Hard cover | Book | I, 413 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Psychology | SCY34000 | Law and Psychology | JMK | SCX15000 | Criminology & Criminal Justice | [NAME] | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Social Psychology and Problem Solving Courts: Judicial Roles and Decision Making.- The Marriage of Science and the Law in Child Welfare Cases.- Exploring the Value-Added of Specialized Problem-Solving Courts for Dependency Cases.- Dependency Courts and Science.- Unified Family Courts:  An Interdisciplinary Framework and   A Problem-Solving Approach.- Domestic Violence Courts: The Case of Lady Justice Meets the Serpents of the Caduceus.- Gender Issues in Problem-Solving Courts.- Mental Health Courts May Work, But Does it Matter if they do?.- The Past, Present, and Future of Mental Health Courts.- Mental Health Courts: Competence, Responsibility, and Proportionality.- The evolution of problem-solving courts in Australia and New Zealand: A Trans-Tasman comparative perspective.- The Intended and Unintended Consequences of Problem Solving Courts. | In order to make the criminal court system more effective there has been a growing trend to have courts participate in what is essentially a rehabilitation strategy. Such courts are often referred to as “problem-solving” because they are working on root causes of criminal behavior as part of the dispensation of justice. This major shift in the role of the courts means that the court works closely with prosecutors, public defenders, probation officers, social workers, and other justice system partners to develop a strategy that pressures offenders to complete a treatment program which will ultimately, hopefully prevent recidivism. Research has shown that this kind of strategy has a two-fold benefit. It has been successful in helping offenders turn their lives around which leads to improved public safety and the ultimate saving of public funds. This book is the first to focus exclusively on problem solving courts, and as such it presents an overview of the rationale and scientific evidence for such courts as well as individual sections on the key areas in which these courts are active. Thus there is specific attention paid to domestic violence, juvenile criminality, mental health, and more. Throughout, research findings are incorporated into general discussions of these courts operate and ideally what they are trying to accomplish. There is also discussion of how such courts should evolve in the future and the directions that further research should take. | Covers the full range of problem-solving courts <br>The most comprehensive coverage of the topic with contributions by leading experts <br>Provides the existing research base and indications for future research directions | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-94-007-6868-0 | Psychology | [NAME] | Helena Águeda Marujo; [NAME] | Positive Nations and Communities | Collective, Qualitative and Cultural-Sensitive Processes in Positive Psychology | Cross-Cultural Advancements in Positive Psychology | 6 | 1 | 2014 | 288 | Hard cover | Book | XVI, 288 p. 5 illus., 3 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Psychology | SCY44000 | Positive Psychology | [NAME] | SCX23000 | Quality of Life Research | JFF | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface; Ruut Veenhoven.- Introduction: Towards a Participatory and Ethical Consciousness in Positive Psychology; Helena Águeda Marujo and [NAME] Neto.- Part I. Introductory Perspectives.- Chapter 1. Two Images: Rhizome and the Gift Exchange in Life and Service; [NAME]. Positive Institutions, Communities, and Nations: Methods and Internationalizing Positive Psychology Concepts; [NAME]. Display of Psychological Attributes: From Personal to Social.- Chapter 3. The Altruism Spiral: An Integrated Model for a Harmonious Future; [NAME] and [NAME] Fave.- Chapter 4. The Importance of Friendship in the Construction of Positive Nations; [NAME] and [NAME] Vega.- Chapter 5. [NAME]: A Culture Specific Effective Practice for Well-Being; [NAME], Anjali Jain and Dalbir Singh.- Chapter 6. Co-curricular Activities and Student Development: How Positive Nations encourage students to pursue careers in Psychology; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Chai.- Part III. Realization: From Individual to Collective.- Chapter 7. The European Championship as a Positive Festivity: Changes in Strenghts of Character Before, During and After the Euro 2008 in Switzerland; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and Willibald Ruch.- Chapter 8. Positive Psychology and Interpersonal Forgiveness within [NAME]; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Koller.- Chapter 9. South Africa's Truth and Reconciliation Process as Applied Positive Psychology in Nation Building; [NAME] and [NAME] Temane.- Part IV- Agency: From Passive to Active.- Chapter 10. Gross National Happiness: A Case Example of a Himalayan Kingdom’s Attempt to Build Positive Nations; [NAME] 11. The Revolution of Happiness and the Happiness of Political Revolutions: Reflections around the Portuguese Case; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Alves.- Chapter 12. Positive Community Psychology and Positiv Community Development: Research and Intervention as Transformative Appreciative Actions; [NAME] and Helena Águeda Marujo.-Chapter 13. From South West Africa to Namibia: Subjective Well-Being Twenty-one Years after Independence; [NAME] and [NAME].    ​ | This book approaches the field of positive psychology from a post-modern perspective. It explores the consequences of combining current trends and models with supplementary participatory and transformative methods. The book brings a more collective, qualitative, culturally sensitive and transformative approach to the processes of making sense and implementing the science of positive psychology. It moves beyond the individual level towards a “knowledge community” and “knowledge of the communities”. The book is an invitation to more participatory and polyphonic dialogues in the field of positive psychology. | <p>Approaches the field of positive psychology from a post-modern perspective</p><p>Challenges ideas and procedures while building upon the virtues of current models<br><br>Builds on Maslow’s idea of “growth science”</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6823-9 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME] | Gender and [NAME] | Riding Around the World |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 216 | Hard cover | Book | VIII, 216 p. 7 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX22000 | Sociology, general | JHB | SCY20090 | Gender Studies | JMG | Social Sciences / Sociology | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Acknowledgments.- Chapter 1. Introduction. Women, Men and Horses: Looking at the Equestrian World through a “Gender Lens”; [NAME] and Jorge Knijnik.- Chapter 2. From [NAME] to Drudgery - Changing Gender Patterns in the Equine Sector: A Comparative Study of Sweden and Great Britain in the 20th Century: [NAME] and [NAME] White.- Chapter 3. Beyond the Binary: Gender Integration in British [NAME]; [NAME] 4. Becoming ‘One of the Lads’: Women, Horseracing and [NAME] in the United Kingdom; [NAME] Butler.- Chapter 5. Tradition and Transgression: Women Who Ride the Rodeo in Southern Brazil; [NAME] and [NAME] Becker.- Chapter 6. Romancing the Horse: Adventure and Femininity in Juvenile Equine Fiction for Girls; [NAME] Singleton.- Chapter 7. Women in Equestrian Polo: Cultural Capital and Sport Trajectories; [NAME] and [NAME] Gillett.- Chapter 8. Cojones and Rejones:  Multiple Ways of Experiencing, Expressing and Interpreting  Gender in the Spanish Mounted Bullfight (rejoneo); Kirrilly Thompson.- Chapter 9. We Have to Make Horse Riding More Masculine!: On the Difference between Masculine Needs and Feminine practices in the Context of Swedish Equestrian Sports; Birgitta Plymoth.- Chapter 10. Horse Power: Gender, Work and Wealth in Canadian Show Jumping; [NAME] Coulter.- Chapter 11. The Black, the White, the Green: Fluid Masculinities on Brazilian Dressage; Jorge Knijnik.- Chapter 12. Epilogue. A Research Agenda for Putting Gender Through its Paces; [NAME] and [NAME]. | This volume brings together studies from various disciplines of the social sciences and humanities ( anthropology, sociology, cultural studies, history and literary theory) that shed light on the equestrian world as a historically gendered and highly dynamic field of contemporary sport and culture.  From high level international dressage and jumping, polo and the turf, to the rodeo world of the Americas and popular forms of equestrian sport and culture, we are introduced to a range of  issues that  are played out at local and global, national and international levels. Students and scholars of gender, culture and sport  will find much of interest in this original look at contemporary issues such as “engendered” (women’s and men’s) identities/subjectivities as equestrians, representations of girls, horses and the world of adventure in juvenile fiction;  the current “feminization” of particular equestrian activities (and where boys and men stand in relation to this);  how broad forms of social inequality and stratification play themselves out within gendered equestrian contexts; men and women and their relation to horses within the framework of current discussions on the relation of animals to humans (which may  include not only love and care, but also exploitation and violence), among others.  Singular contributions  show how   equestrian activities contribute to historical and current constructions of embodied “femininities” and “masculinities”, reflecting a world that has been moving “beyond the binaries” while continuing to be enmeshed in their persistent and contradictory legacy. ​ | <p>Fulfills a  longstanding need for academic reflection on a unique arena of sporting culture</p><p>Provides fresh insight into the world of gender and sport</p><p>Enables new assessments of the problems and potential for gender equality in sporting culture  </p><p>   ​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6871-0 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME]; Beatrice Hale; [NAME] | Family Care and Social Capital: Transitions in Informal Care |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 160 | Hard cover | Book | XIX, 160 p. 3 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX22000 | Sociology, general | JHB | SCW23220 | Health Care Management | KCQ | Social Sciences / Sociology | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: Family Care and Social Capital.- Chapter 2: Informal Care in Social Context: An Expression of Social Relationships.- Chapter 3: The Dynamic Experience of Caregiving.- Chapter 4: [NAME] and Early Childhood.- Chapter 5: Caring for Family Members with a Lifelong Disability.- Chapter 6: Caring for Adults with Acquired Disabilities.- Chapter 7: Caring for Older People.- Chapter 8: Caring across the Generations.- Chapter 9: In support of Informal Carers. | Becoming a caregiver is increasingly an inevitable experience for many people and, therefore, a likely life transition. Drawing on research and personal experiences of working with family caregivers, this book examines a range of family caregiving situations from across the life course. It seeks to capture the dynamics of caregiving in a number of common situations: caregiving during infancy, for adults who acquire a disability through accidents or illness, for older people with age-related issues, and caregiving by children and adolescent carers and grandparent carers. In drawing attention to key moments of vulnerability faced by family and informal caregivers, and by suggesting how to assist ‘reconnection’ at these moments, the book provides a guide for those working in the area of health, disability and care.  Informal care is conceptualised as occurring with the context of personal interrelationships, these being nested within wider kin networks and linked with wider professional formal care networks.  Informal care is seen both as an expression of social capital and as an activity that builds social capital.  It is an indicator of resources of mutual support within social networks, and it has the effect of adding to the stock of social resources.  The book makes a case, therefore, for facilitating the development of social capital by strengthening the capacity of informal caregivers and caregiver groups, and by improving the linkages with formal care organisations. | <p>Caregiving situations at different life course stages </p><p>Focus on key moments of vulnerability faced by family and informal caregivers</p><p>Focus on facilitating the development of social capital </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-8013-6 | Social Sciences | Becvar | [NAME] | Handbook of Family Resilience |  |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 557 | Soft cover | Book | XVII, 557 p. 6 illus. | 0 | approx. | 66.99 | 71.68 | 73.69 | 60.99 | 89 | English | Social Sciences | [NAME] | Family | JHBK | [NAME] | Psychotherapy and Counseling | MMJT | Social Sciences | Handbook | Springer New York | In production | 2013-08-01 00:00:00 |  |  | RESILIENCE IN GENERAL.- Roads to Understanding Family Resilience:  1920s to the 21st Century.- Operationalizing Family Resilience as Process:  Proposed Methodological Strategies.- The Ramifications for Clinical Practice of a Focus on Family Resilience.- Facilitating Family Resilience in Clinical Practice.- Community- Based Practice Applications of a Family Resilience Framework.- RESILIENCE AND FAMILIES.- Resilience Relative to Step Families.- Resilience in Military Marriages Experiencing Deployment.- Family Resilience and Parenting.- [NAME] and At-Risk Youth.- Family Resilience in the Context of High Risk Situations.- RESILIENCE AND ETHNICITY.- Resilience in Ethnic Family Systems:  A Relational Theory for Research and Practice.- Native American Family Resilience.- Familias Fuertes: Family Resilience Among Latinos.- Resilience in Black Families.- Resilience Relative to Korean Families.- RESILIENCE, LOSS, AND GRIEF.- Family Resilience in the Wake of Loss:  A Meaning-Oriented Contribution.- Resilience as Tolerance for Ambiguity.- Bereavement in the Face of Perinatal Loss: A Hardiness Perspective.- Family Resilience Relative to Parental Death.-Resilience in Aging:  Moving through Challenge to Wisdom.-RESILIENCE AND ABILITY.- Family Resilience Relative to Children with Severe Disabilities.- Nurturing Family Resilience in Response to Chronic Illness:  An Integrative.- Approach to Health and Growth Promotion.-Enhancing Resilience in Families of Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder.- Family Resilience Relative to Mental Health Challenges.- Strengthening Family Resilience through Spiritual and Religious Resources.- RESILIENCE, [NAME], AND ABUSE.- Family and Community Resilience Relative to the Experience of Mass Trauma: Connectedness to Family and Culture of Origin as the Core Components of Healing.- Resilience Despite Risk:  Understanding African American ACOAs? [NAME] and [NAME] Fostering Resilience in Daughters of Battered Women.- [NAME] and Sexuality.- The Community as Family: Resilience in Older Women Religious Sexually Abused as Children. | Resilience is a topic that is currently receiving increased attention.  In general, resilience refers to the capacity of those who, even under the most stressful circumstances, are able to cope, to rebound, and to go on and thrive.  Resilient families are able to regain their balance following crises that arise as a function of either nature or nurture, and to continue to encourage and support their members as they deal with the necessary requirements for accommodation, adaptation and, ultimately, healthy survival. Handbook of Family Resilience provides a broad body of knowledge regarding the traits and patterns found to characterize resilient individuals and well-functioning families, including those with diverse structures, various ethnic backgrounds and a variety of non-traditional forms. This [NAME] brings together a variety of perspectives aimed at understanding and helping to facilitate resilience in families relative to a full range of challenges. | <p>Combines research, theory, and practice </p><p>Presents the full range of problems faced by families (i.e., addictions, domestic violence) </p><p>Includes recommendations for future research </p><p>Covers a range of ethnic groups </p><p>Contains a comprehensive section on grief   </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6753-9 | Social Sciences | Braun | [NAME] | Democratic Culture and Moral Character | A Study in Culture and Personality |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 264 | Hard cover | Book | IX, 264 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX22000 | Sociology, general | JHB | SCY20050 | Personality and Social Psychology | JMS | Social Sciences / Sociology | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | Available | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 | 2013-06-18 00:00:00 |  | Foreword; Prof. [NAME] Chapter 1. Introduction.- Part I.  Democracy and Character.- Chapter 2. Understanding Democracy as a Prerequisite for Spreading Democracy.- Chapter 3. The Faking of Charisma and Decadence: Cultural Decay Through the Ages.- Chapter 4. Modernity and Intimacy.- Chapter 5. How Nationalism is Similar to Juvenile Delinquency.- Part II. Pragmatism and Character.- Chapter 6. Pragmatism as the Basis of American Culture in an Individualistic Society.- Chapter 7. Formal and Informal Uses of Law for Ensuring Personal Freedom: A Short Cross-Cultural Comparison.- Part III. The Evolution of Democratic Character and Culture.- Chapter 8. Limited Alternatives and Personal Identity:  The Relation Between Freedom and Personal Responsibility.- Chapter 9. America as a Post-Feudal Society, or How to Relate to the Islamic World.- Chapter 10. Personal Versus Impersonal Forms of Exploitation.-Part IV. Conclusion.- Chapter 11. Politics from the Bottom Up, Rather Than the Top Down.- Chapter 12. Means and Ends in Personal Relationships.- Chapter 13. The Sense of Self in Democratic Societies.- Chapter 14. A Basic Summary on Social Evolution and Character.- Bibliography. | This book returns critical theory to its roots in both psychology and the social sciences. It shows some of the relationships between equality in a political and social sense and personal identity that either relates well to such equality, or rebels against it. All this reflects processes of social and cultural influence that involve not only random change but also processes of social and cultural evolution that themselves have effects regarding potentials for self-fulfillment and even public morality. This book provides a framework to help one study the interaction between individual aspirations and social opportunities.[NAME], known for his writings in interdisciplinary social science, an approach he calls pragmatic critical theory, here provides a book that discusses issues relevant to the moral underpinnings of democratic society, including issues of social evolution and of culture and personality. This book will be of particular interest to scholars and students of Psychology (particularly in the areas of Psychology of Personality and Cultural Psychology), Sociology (especially those interested in Sociology of Alienation and Sociology of Culture, as well as Sociology of Mental Health), Anthropology (particularly in the area of Psychological Anthropology), Cultural Studies, and Social Theory in general. | <p>Illustrates the possibilities for Pragmatic Critical Theory </p><p>Describes the relevance of a psychodynamic perspective for the social sciences </p><p>Shows what a return of Critical Theory to its social science roots can produce</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6771-3 | Social Sciences | DeLamater | [NAME]; [NAME] | Handbook of Social Psychology |  | Handbooks of Sociology and Social Research |  | 2 | 2013 | 609 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 609 p. 7 illus., 4 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 249 | 266.43 | 273.9 | 224.5 | 331.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX22000 | Sociology, general | JHB | SCY12005 | Clinical Psychology | MMJ | Social Sciences / Sociology | Handbook | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface; [NAME] and Amanda Ward.- Part I. Theoretical Perspectives.- Chapter 1. Interactionist Perspectives in Social Psychology; [NAME]. Identity Theory; [NAME] and [NAME] Chapter 3. Social Exchange Theory; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and Sandra Nakagawa.- Chapter 4. Social Structure and Personality; [NAME] Schnittker.- Part II. Development and Socialization.- Chapter 5. Socialization in Childhood and Adolescence; [NAME] Chapter 6. Socialization for Primary, Intimate, and Work Relationships in the Adult Life Course; [NAME] and [NAME]. Personal Processes.- Chapter 7. Social Psychology and the Body; Eva Shapiro.- Chapter 8. Self and Self-Concept; [NAME] and [NAME] Samblanet.- Chapter 9. Language Use and Social Interaction; [NAME] and [NAME] Turowetz.- Chapter 10. Motivation, Motives, and Individual Agency; [NAME] 11. Values, Attitudes, and Ideologies: Explicit and Implicit Constructs Shaping Perception and Action; [NAME] and [NAME] Pinkton.- Chapter 12. Emotions; Shane Sharp and [NAME] Kidder.- Part IV. Interpersonal Processes.- Chapter 13. Intimate Relationships; [NAME] and [NAME] 14. Interaction in Small Groups; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 15. Interaction in Social Networks; [NAME] and [NAME] 16. The Social Psychology of Stress, Health and Coping; [NAME] and [NAME] Umberson.- Part V. The Person in Sociocultural Context.- Chapter 17. Social Psychology of Race and Gender; [NAME] and [NAME] 18. Intergroup Relations; [NAME] 19. Social Psychological Perspectives on Deviance; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Chapter 20. Cross-Cultural and International Perspectives; [NAME] and [NAME]. | This handbook provides a broad overview of the field of social psychology and up-to-date coverage of current social psychological topics. It reflects the recent and substantial development of the field, both with regard to theory and empirical research. It starts out by covering major theoretical perspectives, including the interactionist, identity, social exchange, social structure and the person perspectives. Next, it discusses development and socialization in childhood, adolescence and adulthood. In addition to updated discussions of topics that were included in the first edition, the part examining personal processes includes entirely new topics, such as social psychology and the body and individual agency and social motivation. Interpersonal processes are discussed from a contemporary perspective with a focus on stress and health. The final section examines the person in sociocultural context, and includes another topic new to the second edition, the social psychology of race and gender and intersectionality. | <p>Includes systematic discussions of research methods</p><p>Provides a broad overview of the field of social psychology</p><p>Includes chapters on new topics, updated chapters and contemporary perspectives</p><p> </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7051-5 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | Corinna [NAME]; [NAME] | Modelling Norms |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 204 | Hard cover | Book | X, 204 p. 33 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX17000 | Methodology of the Social Sciences | JHBC | SCI21025 | Simulation and Modeling | UGK | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Theorising Norms.- Theorising Crime.- Agent-based Modelling.- The Environment and Social Norms.- Punishment and Social Norms.- Imitation and Social Norms.- Socially Situated Social Norms.- Internalisation and Social Norms.- Modelling Norms.- Delinquent Networks.- Social Construction of Knowledge.- Morality.- We-Intentionality.- Conclusion.- Index. | The book focusses on questions of individual and collective action, the emergence and dynamics of social norms and the feedback between individual behaviour and social phenomena. It discusses traditional modelling approaches to social norms and shows the usefulness of agent-based modelling for the study of these micro-macro interactions. Existing agent-based models of social norms are discussed and it is shown that so far too much priority has been given to parsimonious models and questions of the emergence of norms, with many aspects of social norms, such as norm-change, not being modelled.  [NAME] delinquency, group radicalisation and moral decision making are used as case studies for agent-based models of collective action extending existing models by providing an embedding into social networks, social influence via argumentation and a causal action theory of moral decision making. The major contribution of the book is to highlight the multifaceted nature of the dynamics of social norms, consisting not only of emergence, and the importance of embedding of agent-based models into existing theory. | <p>Contains the first systematical assessment of the contribution of Agent [NAME] to the analysis of norms and deviance</p><p>Provides a cognitive enrichment to the largely behavioural simulation models by formalizing and implementing a moral form of reasoning</p><p>Highlights the multifaceted nature of the dynamics of social norms</p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6792-8 | Social Sciences | Gaimard | [NAME] | Population and Health in Developing Countries |  | [NAME] and Socio-Economic Development | 2 | 1 | 2013 | 165 | Hard cover | Book | XIX, 165 p. 30 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX25000 | [NAME] | JHBD | SCH27002 | Public Health | MBN | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: Health and Development.- Chapter 1: Health, Morbidity and Development. Definitions and Concepts.- Chapter 2: The On-Going Health Transition in Developing Countries.- Chapter 3: Measuring Population Health.- Chapter 4: Mortality in Developing Countries: Profound Changes.- Chapter 5: Women's Health.- Chapter 6: Morbidity: A Double Burden for Developing Countries.- Chapter 7: Health Systems in Developing Countries.- Conclusion.- References.- Annexs.- List of Tables.- List of Figures. | This book provides an overview of the health of developing nations in the early twenty-first century. The basic assumption is that the health of a population is not independent of broader demographic trends, and does follow the health transition model. The coverage is broad, ranging from health transition in developing countries, to the health of women, to an analysis of morbidity. Population health is an essential component of human and social development. As both a means and an end of development, health lies at the heart of underdevelopment, and ranks first on the list of international priorities. The WHO slogan ‘Health for all in 2000’ reflects the spirit of a more general movement in favor of health promotion throughout the world. But the developing world is far from reaching this aim. The health of populations has improved in developing regions but there are still deep inequalities, and serious problems remain, especially in Sub-Saharan Africa. After reviewing the core concepts of population health, the book examines health transition in developing countries, a process that has resulted in a double burden of diseases. A discussion of mortality in developing countries serves to highlight the high rates of child mortality in these regions. The book devotes a full chapter to women’s health, and its chapter-length analysis of morbidity highlights the double burden weighing down developing populations and concludes with an analysis of health systems in developing countries. | <p>Provides an updated synthesis of population health, a crucial problem for developing countries   </p><p>Addresses current major epidemics and endemic diseases   </p><p>Covers women’s health, child mortality and health systems in developing countries</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7100-0 | Social Sciences | Haltinner | [NAME] | Teaching Race and Anti-Racism in Contemporary America | Adding Context to Colorblindness |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 441 | Hard cover | Book | VIII, 441 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX22000 | Sociology, general | JHB | SCX22040 | Cultural Studies | JFC | Social Sciences / Sociology | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. Introduction: Challenges and Opportunities in Teaching About Race and Racism in the 21st Century; [NAME] Haltinner.- PART I: CULTIVATING IN THE SOCIOLOGICAL IMAGINATION.- Chapter 2. Challenging the Myth of 'Post-Racial' America: Revelations from Both Sides of the Desk; [NAME] and [NAME] Mueller.- Chapter 3. The Importance of a Race-Critical Perspective in the Classroom; [NAME] 4. Beyond the Trial: The Disproportionate Imprisonment of African Americans; [NAME] and [NAME] Whetstone.- Chapter 5. [NAME]; Privilege in the Classroom: Theoretical and Empirical Foundations and Models; [NAME] 6. Teaching about Race and Racism: The Imperative of History; Tema Okun.- Chapter 7. Teaching About Organized Racism; [NAME] and Kelsey Burke.- PART II. THE IMPORTANCE OF COMMUNICATION AND CLASS CLIMATE.- Chapter 8. Getting Students to Say What They Are Not Supposed to Say; [NAME] Croll.- Chapter 9. Dealing with Emotions in the Classroom; Carissa Froyum.- Chapter 10. [NAME] in the Long Shadow of Colonialism: Two Perspectives on Teaching Anti-Racism at a Tribal College; [NAME] and [NAME] 11. Teaching Millennials about Race and Ethnicity through First-Year Learning Communities; [NAME] and [NAME] Anyiwo.- PART III. CONNECTING WITH STUDENTS.- Chapter 12. After Colorblindness: Teaching Antiracism to White Progressives in the U.S.; [NAME] Warren.- Chapter 13. What Students Bring to the Classroom: Visions of a ''Post-Racial'' America; Enid Logan.- Chapter 14. Bringing Students into the Matrix: A Framework and Tools for Teaching About Race and Overcoming Student Resistance; [NAME] Ferber.- PART IV. INNOVATIVE TECHNIQUES.- Chapter 15. Transformatory, Community Based Teaching about Race; [NAME] 16. Teaching About Race through Sports; [NAME] 17. Teaching About Affirmative Action; [NAME] Pierce.- Chapter 18. Unpacking the White Privilege Knapsack; Kristin Haltinner.- Chapter 19. Connections and Crossroads: Using Memoirs to Teach about Race and Ethnicity in the United States; [NAME] Chapter 20. Lessons from 'Cash'; [NAME] 21. Experiencing Racialization: Digital Ethnography as Professional Development for Teachers; [NAME] 22. ‘Veiled for Day’: Social Justice Experiments and Race Pedagogies; Jamil Khader.- PART V. ENGAGING WITH ACADEMIC INSTITUTIONS.- Chapter 23. How “Diversity” Trumped “Race” at One Elite Research University; [NAME] Mariscal.- Chapter 24. Teaching about [NAME]; [NAME] 25. Teaching About Environmental Justice; [NAME] 26. Movement for Transformation: Motivating Students to Engage after the Class Ends; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Gomes.-  Chapter 27. Conclusion - Lessons Learned: Pedagogical and Theoretical Strategies for Teaching Race; [NAME]. | This book presents thoughtful reflections and in-depth, critical analyses of the new challenges and opportunities instructors face in teaching race during what has been called the “post-racial era”. It examines the racial dimensions of the current political, economic, and cultural climate. The book features renowned scholars and experienced teachers from a range of disciplines and offers successful strategies for teaching important concepts through case studies and active learning exercises. It provides innovative strategies, novel lesson plans and classroom activities for college and university professors who seek effective methods and materials for teaching about race and racism to today’s students.  A valuable handbook for educators, this book should be required reading for all graduate students and college instructors. | <p>Innovative classroom activities and curriculum design, tested by renowned college and university instructors </p><p>Features thoughtful reflections on teaching about race and racism by pioneers in the field </p><p>Addresses dealing with student emotions and cultural resistance regarding discussions on race ​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6814-7 | Social Sciences | de Hart | Joep de Hart; [NAME]; [NAME] | Religion and Civil Society in Europe |  |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 312 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 312 p. 20 illus., 13 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX22000 | Sociology, general | JHB | SCV26000 | Religious Studies | HRA | Social Sciences / Sociology | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Acknowledgements.- Note on the European Values Study as Main Data Source.- Preface.- Chapter 1. Introduction: European Diversity and Divergences; Joep de Hart, [NAME] and [NAME] Halman.- Chapter 2. Religion and Civil Society: Theoretical Reflections; [NAME] Herbert.- Chapter 3. Religion, State and Civil Society in Europe: Triangular Entanglements; [NAME]. The Dynamics of Civil Society: Density, [NAME], Fertility and Completeness in the Religious Voluntary Sector; Sigrid Roßteutscher.- Chapter 5. Secularization and Shifting Sources of Morality: Religion and Morality in Contemporary Europe; [NAME] and [NAME] Ingen.- Chapter 6. Social Trust and Religion in Sweden: Theological Belief vs. Social Organization; [NAME] and [NAME]..- Chapter 7. Religion and Civil Society in Italy and Other Latin Countries; [NAME] Garelli.- Chapter 8. Secular Values, Religious Beliefs and Civil Life: A Comparative Analysis of Helping Values and [NAME]; [NAME] and [NAME] Storm.- Chapter 9. Religion, Spirituality and Civic Participation; Joep de Hart and [NAME] Dekker.- Chapter 10. The Spiritual Revolution and Social Capital in Denmark; [NAME]. Religion and Social Participation in Postcommunist Europe; [NAME] and Claudiu Tufiş.- Chapter 12. Religion and Civil Society in the Post-Soviet Space; [NAME] and Yuliya Sereda.- Chapter 13. The Impact of Religion on the Political Participation of Muslims: The Case of Switzerland; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Michel.- Chapter 14. Democracy, Civil Society and Islam; Yilmaz Esmer.- Chapter 15. Does Praying Together Means Staying Together?: Religion and Civic Engagement in Europe and the United States; [NAME]. | Religion is back again in Europe after never having been gone. It is manifest in the revival of religious institutions and traditions in former communist countries, in political controversies about the relationship between the church(es) and the state and about the freedom of religion and the freedom to criticize religion, and in public unease about religious minorities. This book is about religion and civil society in Europe. It moves from general theoretical and normative approaches of this relationship, via the examination of national patterns of religion-state relations, to in-depth analyses of the impact of religion and secularization on the values, pro-social attitudes and civic engagement of individuals. It covers Europe from the Lutheran North to the Catholic South, and from the secularized West to the Orthodox East and Islamic South-East with comparative analyses and country studies, concluding with an overall Europe-USA comparison. | <p>Based on the European Values Survey (EVS) conducted from 1981-2009 </p><p>Focuses on the diversity of Europe and how secularization has affected civic engagement </p><p>Contributors are leaders in the field of civil society and religious life</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7237-3 | Social Sciences | Hoffmeyer-Zlotnik | [NAME]; Uwe Warner | [NAME] and Socio-Economic Variables for Cross-National Comparative Survey Research |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 200 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX17000 | Methodology of the Social Sciences | JHBC | SCS16003 | Statistics for Social Science, Behavorial Science, Education, Public Policy, and [NAME] | JHBC | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. Harmonisation of [NAME] and Socio-Economic Variables.- Chapter 2. The Harmonisation Process: Harmonosation is not Translation.- Chapter 3. Existing Measurement Instruments for Data Collection.- Chapter 4. Background Variables for Cross-National Comparative Research: Data Sources.- Chapter 5. Core Social Variables and Their Implentation in Measurement Instruments.- Chapter 6. The Proposed Set of Instruments at a Glance.- Chapter 7. Comparability of Currently Available Survey Data. | This book explains harmonisation techniques that can be used in survey research to align national systems of categories and definitions in such a way that comparison is possible across countries and cultures. It provides an introduction to instruments for collecting internationally comparable data of interest to survey researchers. It shows how seven key demographic and socio-economic variables can be harmonised and employed in European comparative surveys. The seven key variables discussed in detail are: education, occupation, income, activity status, private household, ethnicity, and family. These demographic and socio-economic variables are background variables that no survey can do without. They frequently have the greatest explanatory capacity to analyse social structures, and are a mirror image of the way societies are organised nationally. This becomes readily apparent when one attempts, for example, to compare national education systems. Moreover, a comparison of the national definitions of concepts such as 'private household' reveals several different historically and culturally shaped underlying concepts. Indeed, some European countries do not even have a word for  'private household'. Hence such national definitions and categories cannot simply be translated from one culture to another. They must be harmonised.    ​ | <p>Provides harmonisation techniques for researchers engaged in cross-national comparative social science research in Europe</p><p>Discusses individual techniques of harmonisation using international comparison</p><p>Explains harmonisation techniques that can be used in survey research to align national systems of categories and definitions </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-7878-2 | Social Sciences | Holzhacker | [NAME]; [NAME] | Freedom, Security, and Justice in the European Union | Internal and External Dimensions of Increased Cooperation after the Lisbon Treaty |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 159 | Hard cover | Book | VI, 159 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | [NAME] | Comparative Politics | JPB | SCW12073 | European Integration | KCS | Social Sciences / Political Science | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | ​1. Freedom, Security, and Justice: [NAME] and [NAME] alization in the EU and the Member States after the Lisbon Treaty.- 2. New Parliamentary Practices in Justice and Home Affairs: Some Observations.- 3. Non-Binding Peer Evaluation within an Area of Freedom, Security, and Justice.- 4. Redefining the relationship between security, data retention and human rights.- 5. The Externalization of undocumented migration controls as a threat for the EU’s constitutional commitment to fundamental human rights?.- 6.  Prüm Treaty and Prüm decision.- 7. The Interface between the Area of Freedom, Security and Justice and the Common Foreign and Security Policy of the EU: Legal Constraints to Political Objectives​. | As the European Union has evolved, it has also begun to address policy questions which are closer to the very heart of the state. From cooperation in Justice and Home Affairs, originally conceived as the third pillar of European cooperation, has emerged the Area of Freedom, Security, and Justice (AFSJ). A unique aspect of policy in this area is the desire to integrate the internal and external dimensions of this policy area. One of the tensions in this policy area has been balancing the protection of fundamental rights and increasing security. The first part of this book focuses on the institutional relations of policymaking in AFSJ, both within member states and between member states, in particular the issues of national executive control, national parliamentary scrutiny and peer review across the member states with regard to AFSJ. The second part focuses on specific policy areas which are part of AFSJ. Two chapters highlight the tension found in this policy area between security and human or fundamental rights, the first related to data retention and the second on policing external borders. The final two chapters are concerned with data exchange among  European countries and transatlantically with the US, and the interface between AFSJ and the Common Foreign and Security Policy (CFSP). The chapters contained in the book were presented at the Dutch Ministry of the Interior and Kingdom Relations and the Dutch national parliament (Tweede Kamer), making it of interest to scholars and practitioners alike. | <p>​​Focuses on the institutional relations of policymaking in AFSJ, both within member states and between member states</p><p>Examines the peer review process for conduct evaluations by member states, in collaboration with the European Commission</p><p>Investigates the tension between security and fundamental rights, data retention, the policing of external borders and the interface of ASFJ with the Common Foreign and Security Policy​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6777-5 | Social Sciences | Kandala | [NAME]; Gebrenegus Ghilagaber | Advanced Techniques for Modelling Maternal and Child Health in Africa |  | The Springer Series on [NAME] and Population Analysis | 34 | 1 | 2014 | 322 | Hard cover | Book | X, 322 p. 39 illus., 20 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX25000 | [NAME] | JHBD | SCH27025 | Maternal and Child Health | MJTF | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1: Advanced Techniques for Modelling Maternal and Child Health in Africa: [NAME], [NAME] and Gebrenegus Ghilagaber.- PART I: CHILD HEALTH AND SURVIVAL: 2: Disentangling Selection and Causality in Assessing the Effects of Health Inputs on Child Survival. Case Studies from Egypt, Eritrea, and Uganda: Gebrenegus Ghilagaber.- 3: Modelling Spatial Effects on Childhood Mortality via Geo-Additive Bayesian Discrete-time Survival Model: A Case Study from Nigeria: G Ghilagaber, D Antai and N-B Kandala.- 4: [NAME] Mixed Latent Variable Models with Applications on the Child's Health problems in some African Countries: K Khatab.- 5: Mapping socio-economic inequalities in health status in Malawian children: a Bayesian approach: L Kazembe.- 6: Analysis of Grouped Survival Data: A Synthesis of Various Traditions and Application to Modeling Childhood Mortality in Eritrea: G Ghilagaber.- 7: Modelling Immunisation Coverage in Nigeria using Bayesian Structured Additive Regression: SB Adebayo and WB Yahya.- 8: Macro Determinants of Geographical Variation in Childhood Survival in South Africa using Flexible Spatial Mixture Models: S Manda.- 9: [NAME]-demographic determinants of [NAME] in children in Uganda : A multilevel analysis: SN  Kandala.- PART II: MATERNAL HEALTH: 10: A Family of Flexible Parametric Duration Functions with Applications to Modelling Transition to Parenthood in Eritrea, Ghana, and Kenya: G Ghilagaber, [NAME], and S O Gyimah.- 11: Spatial variation of predictors of prevalent hypertension in Sub-Saharan Africa: A case study of South-Africa: N-B Kandala.- 12: A Semiparametric Stratified Survival Model for Timing of First Birth in South Africa: S Manda, R Meyer and B Cai.- 13: Stepwise Geoadditive Regression modelling of levels and trends of fertility in Nigeria: Guiding tools towards attaining MDGs: SB [NAME] and E Gayawan.- 14: A Spatial Analysis of Age at Sexual Initiation among Nigerian Youth as a Tool for HIV Prevention: A Bayesian Approach: [NAME] et al.- 15: Assessing Geographic Co-morbidity Associated with Vascular Diseases in South Africa: A joint Bayesian Modeling Approach: NB Kandala, SOM Manda, W Tigbe.- 16: Advances in Modelling Maternal and Child Health in Africa: What Have We Learned and What is Next?: Gebrenegus Ghilagaber. | This book presents both theoretical contributions and empirical applications of advanced statistical techniques including geo-additive models that link individual measures with area variables to account for spatial correlation; multilevel models that address the issue of clustering within family and household; multi-process models that account for interdependencies over life-course events and non-random utilization of health services; and flexible parametric alternatives to existing intensity models. These analytical techniques are illustrated mainly through modeling maternal and child health in the African context, using data from demographic and health surveys. In the past, the estimation of levels, trends and differentials in demographic and health outcomes in developing countries was heavily reliant on indirect methods that were devised to suit limited or deficient data. In recent decades, world-wide surveys like the World Fertility Survey and its successor, the Demographic and Health Survey have played an important role in filling the gap in survey data from developing countries. Such modern demographic and health surveys enable investigators to make in-depth analyses that guide policy intervention strategies, and such analyses require the modern and advanced statistical techniques covered in this book. The text is ideally suited for academics, professionals, and decision makers in the social and health sciences, as well as others with an interest in statistical modelling, demographic and health surveys. Scientists and students in applied statistics, epidemiology, medicine, social and behavioural sciences will find it of value. | <p>Examines household surveys data from Africa using novel techniques</p><p>State of the art techniques and their application to real world data</p><p>Empirical results and their implications for evidence-based policy interventions</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-37480-7 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | Jan-[NAME]; [NAME] | Cyberspace and International Relations | Theory, Prospects and Challenges |  |  | 1 | 2013 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 350 p. 2 illus. | 0 | approx. | 99.95 | 106.95 | 109.95 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX18040 | International Relations | JPS | SCI24040 | Computers and Society | UBJ | Social Sciences / Political Science | Contributed volume | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-08-19 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Introduction.- Part I: The [NAME] and IR - Theory.-Power Technology and Powerful Technologies - Global Governmentality and Security in the Cyberspace.- Cyber War and Strategic Thought - Do the Classic Theorists Still Matter? - SAM - A Framework to Understanding Emerging Challenges to States in an Interconnected World.- In Search of Cyber Stability - International Relations, Mutually Assured Destruction and the Age of Cyber Warfare.- Offense-Defense Balance in Cyber Warfare.- The Utility of Timeless Thoughts - Hannah Arendt's Conceptions of Power and Violence in the Age of Cyberization.- Part II:  The [NAME] and IR - Prospects  and Challenges.- Clarifying the International Debate on Stuxnet - Arguments for Stuxnet as an Act of War.- A New Way of Conducting War - Cyberwar, Is That Real? - Peacekeeping 4.0 - Harnessing Potential of Big Data, Social Media, and Cyber Technologies.- US Leadership in Cyberspace - Transnational Cyber Security and Global Governance.- Hierarchies in Networks - Emerging Hybrids of Networks and Hierarchies for Producing Internet Security.- How the 2010 Attack on Google Changed the US Government's Threat Perception of Economic Cyber Espionage.- Cooperative International Approaches to Network Security - Understanding and [NAME] and ITU Efforts to Promote Shared Cybersecurity.- Phreak the Speak - The Flawed Communications within Cyber Intelligentsia.- Reflections on Virtual to Real - Modern Technique, International Security Studies and Cyber Security Environment.- Index. | [NAME] is everywhere in today’s world and has significant implications not only for global economic activity, but also for international politics and transnational social relations. This compilation addresses for the first time the “cyberization” of international relations - the growing dependence of actors in IR on the infrastructure and instruments of the internet, and the penetration of cyberspace into all fields of their activities. The volume approaches this topical issue in a comprehensive and interdisciplinary fashion, bringing together scholars from disciplines such as IR, security studies, ICT studies and philosophy as well as experts from everyday cyber-practice. In the first part, concepts and theories are presented to shed light on the relationship between cyberspace and international relations, discussing implications for the discipline and presenting fresh and innovative theoretical approaches. Contributions in the second part focus on specific empirical fields of activity (security, economy, diplomacy, cultural activity, transnational communication, critical infrastructure, cyber espionage, social media, and more) and address emerging challenges and prospects for international politics and relations. | <p>Presents new theoretical approaches on IR and cyber security</p><p>Broadens the understanding of how international relations are influenced by cyber issues</p><p>Innovative, comprehensive and interdisciplinary approach</p><p>Brings together well-known experts and scholars from various disciplines</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-01097-7 | Social Sciences | Kwon | Huck-ju Kwon; Min [NAME] | The Korean Government and Public Policies in a Development Nexus, Volume 1 |  | The Political Economy of the Asia Pacific | 13 | 1 | 2014 | 138 | Hard cover | Book | VII, 138 p. 14 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX18000 | Political Science, general | JPA | SCW12014 | Development Economics | KCM | Social Sciences / Political Science | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | ​Introduction: The Role of Government in Korea’s Economic and Social Transition.- Part I Government and Coordination for Development.- Institutional Presidency and National Development.- Managing Economic Policy and Coordination: A Saga of the Economic Planning Board.- Bureaucratic Power and Government Competitiveness.- Part II Public Policies for Development.- Governing the Developmental Welfare State: From Regulation to Provision.- Trade Policy for Development: Paradigm Shift from Mercantilism to Liberalism.- Educational Policy, Development of Education, and Economic Growth in Korea.​ | In the postwar period, Korea’s economic and social-political metamorphosis is a rare example of a successful transition from one of the world’s poorest developing countries to a highly sophisticated industrial society—an experience which many developing countries are keen to emulate.  The change is particularly significant as Korea was able to reduce poverty and keep social inequality at a modest level during its rapid economic development. This volume analyzes the Korean transition in regards to the political and institutional foundation of its government and public policies.  The government of Korea single-mindedly carried out public policies to stimulate economic growth, but the government and public policies have themselves been affected and changed by the process.  The contention of this volume is that the transition of Korean society and the evolution of the Korean government are the results of two-way interactions.  In this context, the volume analyzes the way in which the dynamics of public administration were shaped within the Korean government and the kinds of public policies and instruments that were adopted to encourage this economic and social development.  This analysis will allow a more complete understanding of the economic and social transformation of Korea.  Surprisingly, there is a paucity of research on this aspect—a gap which this volume seeks to fill.  This volume shows that it is necessary to maintain consistency and coherence in government and public policy in order to achieve economic and social transformation, making it of interest to both scholars and policy-makers concerned with development in the Asia-Pacific. | <p>​Examines the role of government in South Korea’s economic and social transformation during its developmental period </p><p>Sheds new light on the political and institutional foundations of Korean government’s administrative capacities and pro-growth policies   </p><p>Investigates the link between public administration and socio-economic growth​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11643 | Business and Economics
 | 978-3-642-30050-9 | Social Sciences | Margottini | [NAME] | After the Destruction of Giant Buddha Statues in Bamiyan (Afghanistan) in 2001 | A UNESCO's Emergency Activity for the Recovering and Rehabilitation of Cliff and Niches | Natural Science in Archaeology |  | 1 | 2014 | 283 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 283 p. 223 illus., 164 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.95 | 106.95 | 109.95 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX13000 | Archaeology | HD |  |  |  | Social Sciences / Archaeology | Contributed volume | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | The destruction of the giant [NAME] in Bamiyan.- The foundation of the colossal Buddha Statues.- The history of Buddhas in Bamiyan.- UNESCO’s activities for the safeguarding of Bamiyan.-  Safeguarding the Clay Plaster Remains of the Eastern Buddha Statues and the Rear Side of the Niche.- General environmental condition of the Bamiyan valley.- The tectonic setting of Bamiyan and seismicity in and near Afghanistan for the past 12 centuries.- Properties of local materials.- Possible evolution of niches and trends.- Past experience in conservation and exploitation.- Long-term conservation strategy for repair, enhancement, research and risk-preparedness for the preservation of the site.- Emergency intervention.- The back wall of the niches: preliminary considerations.- Conclusions. | This work reports on a real adventure in earth science and conservation, dealing with the UNESCO’s emergency activities implemented in Bamiyan (Central Afghanistan) for the recovery and rehabilitation of the cliff and niches after the destruction of the two famous Giant Statues in 2001.   Since 2002 an international effort has been made to understand the geological characteristics of the area, the mechanical properties of local materials, petro-geophysical and sedimentological details as well as the historical and geological evolution of the Statues and cliff. Taken together, this information serves as a basis for the recovery and rehabilitation of the cliff and niches and is presented in detail. | <p>Provides unique information on the recovering and rehabilitation of cliff and niches after the destruction of the two Buddha Giant Statues in 2001  </p><p>Provides a detailed documentation of the geological characterisitics of the area  </p><p>Interdisciplinary approach</p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6978-6 | Social Sciences | McEniry | [NAME] | Early Life Conditions and Rapid Demographic Changes in the Developing World | Consequences for Older Adult Health |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 191 | Hard cover | Book | VIII, 191 p. 30 illus., 4 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX25000 | [NAME] | JHBD | SCX11000 | Aging | JFSP31 | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1: Aging Populations and the Determinants of Older Adult Health.- 2: A Contrarian Conjecture, [NAME], Ideal Data, Approach.- 3: Data Sources, Measures, Validity, and a Description of the Older Adult Population.- 4: Cross-National Morbidity Patterns.- 5: Cross-National Mortality Patterns and Health Disparties.- 6: Tide, Trick or Flow.- Appendices.- References.- Index. | This book examines the long term consequences of improvements in life expectancy in the mid 20th century which are partly responsible for the growth of the elderly population in the developing world.  Rapid demographic changes in child and infant mortality due to the reduction in and better treatment of disease were not often accompanied by parallel increases in standard of living. Lower mortality led to greater survival by those who had suffered poor early life conditions.  As a consequence, the early life of these survivors may explain older adult health and in particular the projected increase in adult health disease and diabetes. Recent dietary changes may only compound such early life effects.  This study presents findings from historical and survey data on nearly 147,000 older adults in 20 low-, middle- and high-income countries which suggest that the survivors of poor early life conditions born during the 1930s-1960s are susceptible to disease later in life, specifically diabetes and heart disease.  As the evidence that the aging process is shaped throughout the entire life course increases, this book adds to the knowledge regarding early life events and older adult health. | <p>Tests a tantalizing conjecture regarding mortality decline of the 20th century, early life conditions and older adult health in low and middle income countries. </p><p>Uses a newly compiled cross national data set of over 144,000 older adults from 20 low, middle and high income countries in addition to using extensive historical data to test the conjecture</p><p>Adds to the knowledge regarding early life events and older adult health</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-01248-3 | Social Sciences | Mooij | [NAME] | Human and Mediated Communication around the World | A Comprehensive Review and Analysis |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 350 | Hard cover | Book | VIII, 350 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX28000 | Communication Studies | GTC | SCW23140 | Media Management | KNT | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface- Chapter 1. Communication.- Chapter 2. Orality and Literacy.- Chapter 3. European and American Communication Theories.- Chapter 4. Asian Communication.- Chapter 5. African and West-Asian Communication.- Chapter 6. Culture and Cultural Dimensions.- Chapter 7. Culture, Self and Communication.- Chapter 8. Media Behavior and Culture.- Chapter 9. Communication Products and Culture.- Chapter 10. Mass Media, Journalism, Society and Culture.- Chapter 11. Theories of Mass Communication and Media Effects across Cultures.- Chapter 12. Behavior Change Communication.- Literature.​ | This book is unique in the sense that it offers a comprehensive review and analysis of human communication and mediated communication around the world. This is one of the first attempts to do so in a systematic, comprehensive way. It challenges the assumption that Western theories of human communication and mass communication have universal applicability. It surveys the applicability of mass communication theories to other than Western cultures. The book explains the influence of culture on all forms of communication behavior, be it personal, mediated or mass communication. It presents communication theories from around the world, incorporating a vast body of literature from Europe, Asia, Africa and Latin America. This updated information on important international perspectives that includes both interpersonal and mediated communication is presently not readily available in other sources. The book offers an integrated approach to understanding the working of electronic means of communication that are hybrid media combining human and mediated communication. These new media that are often presented as universal are even more culture-bound than the traditional media. | <p>Offers a broad coverage and integrated approach to theories of human and mediated communication around the world</p><p>Combines interpersonal and mediated communication across cultures in one volume</p><p>Offers access to relevant literature across the world that is not readily available elsewhere</p><p>Presents an overview of the total cross-cultural communication field </p><p>Covers world areas like Asia, Africa and Latin America that are not found in current communication textbooks​</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-8026-6 | Social Sciences | Mytum | [NAME] | Monumentality in Later Prehistory | Building and Rebuilding Castell [NAME] |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 320 | Hard cover | Book | X, 320 p. 141 illus., 87 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX13000 | Archaeology | HD | SCV35000 | Cultural Heritage | JFC | Social Sciences / Archaeology | Monograph | Springer New York | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I    Setting the SceneChapter 1- Enclosure and Monumentality: Hillforts in British and European Late Prehistory Chapter 2- [NAME] in its Temporal, Cultural and [NAME] Part II  The Palisaded SettlementChapter 3 – The Palisade and Entrance Chapter 4- The Interior: Roundhouses, Scoops and Activity AreasChapter 5- A Boundary In Stones: The Chevaux-De-Frise Chapter 6- The Palisaded Settlement: Its Size, Character and Environmental Impact  Part III   Ramparts and Ditches Chapter 7- Previous Research on Hillfort Ramparts and DitchesChapter 8- Ramparts and Ditches on the Western Side of the Fort Chapter 9- The Building of a Rampart: Stratigraphy and Action UnpickedChapter 10- Encircling the Promontory Chapter 11-Ramparts and Ditches: Evidence and Inference  Part IV  The Entrances Chapter 12- [NAME]: Entrances in Stone Chapter 13- [NAME]: From Monumental to Non-Monumental Chapter14- An Epilogue: The Late Roman or post-Roman refurbishment Part V  Conclusions Chapter 15- Context, Function, Meaning | This volume provides the results of a 30-year excavation, reconstruction, and public interpretation campaign at the late prehistoric inland promontory settlement of [NAME], here focusing on the defensive sequence and the role of monumentality in later prehistory. The site has international significance because of the extensive excavations of the Iron Age palisaded settlement and later earthen ramparts, complex gateway, and chevaux-de-frise of upright stones. It is now widely recognised that the Iron Age consisted of many regional cultural traditions, and the excavations at Castell Henllys provide a vital contrast to the well-known large hillfort communities in other parts of England and Wales as well as across Europe. As such, it is a unique window into a widespread but largely ignored site category and form of social and economic organisation. The publication will provide a case study for the construction and use of the earthworks of a major European late prehistoric settlement type – the Iron Age hillfort; the monumental construction is compared with other communal investments such as the Mississippian mounds. It will also offer an innovative form of site reporting, including alternative interpretations of the earthworks as either military defences or the community-binding symbols. Along with Excavation, Experiment, and Heritage Interpretation: Castell [NAME] Then and Now, these books will be required reading by those studying the late prehistoric archaeology of Britain and Europe at advanced undergraduate and postgraduate level, and by those in North America studying complex societies, monumentality, and ways of writing archaeology. | <p>​ Presents one of the most extensively excavated hillfort defences in Britain and Europe </p><p>Considers the social and environmental implications of hillfort construction in a comparative framework </p><p>Provides careful consideration of changing roles of heritage in cultural politics  </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-7767-9 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | R. Roudi [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Transition to Parenthood |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 319 | Hard cover | Book | XXVI, 319 p. 3 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | [NAME] | Family | JHBK | SCY20010 | Developmental Psychology | JMC | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer New York | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | A History of Fertility in America.- Theoretical Perspectives.- Voluntary versus Involuntary Childlessness.- Diversity.- Demographics.- Expectations.- Relationship Maintenance.- Children and Money.- Children with Special Needs.- Program Evaluation and Parenting Programs. | Transition to Parenthood moves beyond a one-study focus and captures multidisciplinary work on all families making the transition to parenthood. The book covers societal trends, changes, and most importantly expectations. Focus is also placed on how families are impacted by their surroundings and their individual members. Strengths and limitations of current theories are discussed, as well as how the phenomenon of parenthood requires a combination of both macro- and micro-level theories. | <p>Provides a comprehensive overview of the transition to parenthood</p><p>Presents research on cross-cultural families</p><p>Highlights directions for future research</p><p>Includes written exercises for clinical practice</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-8261-1 | Social Sciences | Obadare | [NAME] | The Handbook of Civil Society in Africa |  | Nonprofit and Civil Society Studies | 20 | 1 | 2014 | 514 | Hard cover | Book | X, 514 p. 14 illus., 12 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX22000 | Sociology, general | JHB | SCW23200 | Non-Profit Enterprises/Corporate Social Responsibility | KJVX | Social Sciences / Sociology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: Introduction: Turning the Table on Gellner: Alternative Discourses of Civil Society in Africa Chapter 2: Escape from Tyranny: Civil Society and Democratic Struggles in AfricaChapter 3: Civil Society and ReligionChapter 4: Theorizing media as/and civil society in Africa Chapter 5: ‘Good’ State, ‘Bad’ State: Loss and Longing in Postcolonial ZimbabweChapter 6: NGO Accountability in AfricaChapter 7: Civil Society in North AfricaChapter 8: Civil Society Organizations and the State in East Africa: From the Colonial to the Modern EraChapter 9: Civil Society and the Politics of Belonging in Southern AfricaChapter 10: Building Civil Society in West Africa: Notes from the Field Chapter 11: Civil Society in Zimbabwe and ‘Most of the World’Chapter 12: Viral Messaging, [NAME], and Spaces of Resistance in NigeriaChapter 13: Civil Society and Conflict in West AfricaChapter 14: Neoliberalism and the Forms of Civil Society in Kenya and South AfricaChapter 15: Africa Rising? Afro-Optimism and Uncivil Society in an Era of Economic VolatilityChapter 16: Civil Society and Neoliberalism Chapter 17: Popular Organizations in South Africa: from civics to service delivery protestsChapter 18: “If [NAME] is cooked in One Country, We Will All Eat from It:” Women and Civil Society in AfricaChapter 19: NGOs, Civil Society and DevelopmentChapter 20: Civil Society and Sexual Struggles in AfricaChapter 21: Civil Society’s Response to the HIV/AIDS Crisis in AfricaChapter 22: Orature as a Site for Civil Contestation: Film and the Decolonization of Space and Place in Tsitsi Dangarembga’s  [NAME] (Mother’s Day) 2005 Chapter 23: Civil Society and Aid in Africa:  A case of mistaken identity? Chapter 24: Volunteering, Civic Service and Civil Society in AfricaChapter 25: Philanthropic Foundations and Civil Society in Sub-Saharan AfricaChapter 26: Volunteering, Civic Agency and Citizenship in Africa | This volume brings together the most up to date analyses of civil society in Africa from the best scholars and researchers working on the subject. Being the first of its kind, it casts a panoramic look at the African continent, drawing out persisting, if often under-communicated, variations in regional discourses. In a majority of notionally ‘global’ studies, Africa has received marginal attention, a marginality often highlighted by the usual token chapter. Filling a critical hiatus, the Handbook of Civil Society in Africa takes Africa, African developments, and African perspectives very seriously and worthy of academic interrogation in their own right. It offers a critical, clear-sighted perspective on civil society in Africa, and positions African discourses within the framework of important regional and global debates. It promises to be an invaluable reference work for researchers and practitioners working in the fields of civil society, nonprofit studies, development studies, volunteerism, civic service, and African studies. 'This volume signposts a critical turning point in the renewed engagement with the theory and practice of civil society in Africa. Moving from traditional concerns with disquisitions on the appropriateness and possibility of the existence and vibrancy of the idea of civil society on the continent, the volume approaches the forms, contents, and features of the actually existing civil society in Africa from thematic, regional, and national angles. It demonstrates clearly the extent to which core intellectual work on civil society in Africa has largely moved from concerns with cultural reductionism to a nuanced examination of the complexities of  (formal, non-formal, organizational, non-organizational, traditional, newer, usual, unusual) engagements, detailing the extent to which, over time, civil society as a concept has been indigenized, appropriated and adapted in the terrains of politics, society, economy, culture and new technologies on the continent. In all this, the book accomplishes the near-impossible. Without sacrificing the vigour, rigor and freshness of the often unpredictable fruits of up-to-date research into regional and national differences that crop up in the documentation of Africa's multiple realities and discourses, the volume weaves together a rich tapestry of the historical, theoretical and practical dimensions of an expanding civil society sector, and accompanying growth in popular discourse, advocacy, and academic literature, in such a diverse continent as Africa, into a meaningful whole of insightful themes. Written and edited by a very distinguished cross-continental and multi-disciplinary collection of researchers, research students, practitioners and activists, the volume provides cutting-edge evidence and makes a definitive case for a new lease of life for civil society research in Africa.' -Adigun Agbaje,Professor of Political Science, University of Ibadan, Nigeria. | <p>​One of the first to aggregate current scholarly thinking on civil society in Africa from a variety of viewpoints </p><p>Discusses core themes, regional case studies, and development of civil society in Africa </p><p>Focuses on an idea that enjoys widespread currency in both academic and non-academic (including international development) circles</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-7559-0 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Commingled and Disarticulated Human Remains | Working Toward Improved Theory, Method, and Data |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 300 | Hard cover | Book | XX, 300 p. 60 illus., 7 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX13000 | Archaeology | HD | SCX12000 | Anthropology | JHM | Social Sciences / Archaeology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1- IntroductionChapter 2- Making Sense of Social Behavior from Disturbed and Commingled Skeletons: A Case Study from Çatalhöyük, TurkeyChapter 3- Commingled Human Skeletal Assemblages: Integrative Techniques in Determination of the MNI/MNEChapter 4- Bioarchaeological Spatial Analysis of the Walker-Noe Crematory (15GD56)Chapter 5- Into the Kettle:  The Analysis of Commingled Remains from Southern OntarioChapter 6- [NAME]: The Relationship between Bone Mineral Density and Minimum Number of Individuals and Its Effect on Paleodemographic AnalysesChapter 7- [NAME] at Mancos and [NAME]: The Value of Comparative Studies Chapter 8- Disarticulated and Disturbed, Processed and Eaten?  Cautionary Notes from the La Plata Assemblage   (AD 1000-1150)Chapter 9- Partible, [NAME], and Relational Bodies in a Maya Mass GraveChapter 10- Unmingling Commingled Museum Collections: A Photographic MethodChapter 11- [NAME] and secondary burials with commingled remains from archaeological contexts in Cyprus, Greece, and TurkeyChapter 12- Commingled Bone Assemblages: Insights from Zooarchaeology and Taphonomy of a Bonebed at Karain B Cave, SW TurkeyChapter 13- Normal Goat or Diseased Human? Disciplinary Boundaries and Methodological Traps in the Analysis of Fragmentary Remains at Franchthi Cave, GreeceChapter 14- Taking Analyses of Commingled Remains into the Future:  Challenges and Prospects | ​Commingled and Disarticulated Human Remains:Working Toward Improved Theory, Method, and Data brings together research that provides innovative methodologies for the analysis of commingled human remains. It has temporal and spatial breadth, with case studies coming from pre-state to historic periods, as well as from both the New and Old World. Highlights of this volume include:  standardizes methods and presents best practices in the field using a case study approach  demonstrates how data gathered from commingled human remains can be incorporated into the overall interpretation of a site  explores best way to formulate population size, using commingled remains Field archaeologists, bioarchaeologists, academic anthropologists, forensic anthropologists, zoo archaeologists, and students of anthropology and archaeology will find this to be an invaluable resource. | <p>​Unifies a set of standards for how to deal with commingled remains </p><p>Demonstrates how to incorporate theory into analyses involving human remains</p><p> Standardizes methods and presents best practices in the field with case studies</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-81-322-1271-3 | Social Sciences | Panday | Pranab Kumar Panday | Women’s Political Participation in Bangladesh | Institutional Reforms, Actors and Outcomes |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 204 | Hard cover | Book | XVIII, 204 p. 3 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | [NAME] | Gender Studies | [NAME] | SCW27000 | Public Administration | JPP | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer India | Available | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 | 2013-06-14 00:00:00 |  | Chapter 1: Setting the Scene.- Chapter 2: Conceptual Discourses.- Chapter 3: Local Government Reform Efforts: A Perspective of Women’s Political Participation.- Chapter 4: Government and Political Parties in the Reform Process.- Chapter 5: Other Players in the Reform Process: Accessing and Assessing Influence.- Chapter 6: Elected Women Members in the Union Parishad: Representation without Participation.- Chapter 7: Conclusion. | This volume offers an understanding of institutional reforms, gender-related policy dynamics, the role of different actors in the policy process, and the impact of a particular policy on the state of women’s political participation in Bangladesh. The discussion is set against the background of the Fourth World Conference on Women, 1995, in Beijing, in which a Platform for Action signed by heads of governments expressed their countries’ commitment to achieve ‘gender equality and empowerment of women’ through ensuring integration of the gender perspective at all levels. In Bangladesh, notable among the initiatives undertaken was the enactment of the Local Government (Union Parishads) (Second Amendment) of 1997, through which one-third of seats were reserved for women in the Union Parishad (UP) and the system of direct election was introduced to elect women members in reserved seats. The Act of 1997 is considered to be a milestone, since it has enhanced women’s participation in the local government politics significantly. Against this background, the specific research questions that have been addressed in this volume include: the necessity of reform for enhancing women’s participation in politics; the context against which the Government of Bangladesh enacted the Act and the reasons such an initiative was not taken earlier; the actors behind the reforms and their role in the reform process; and the impact of the reform on the state of women’s participation at the local level in Bangladesh. | <p>​The volume combines policy and gender issues in a single study </p><p>It explores the relationship between institutional reforms and women’s political participation in Bangladesh </p><p>It offers interesting insights for further research on women’s political participation in the South Asian region      </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6984-7 | Social Sciences | Piguet | [NAME]; [NAME] | People on the Move in a Changing Climate | The Regional Impact of Environmental Change on Migration | Global Migration Issues | 2 | 1 | 2014 | 250 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 250 p. 29 illus., 5 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | [NAME] | Migration | [NAME] | SC313000 | Climate Change Impacts | RN | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  | 1: Regional Perspectives on Migration, the Environment and Climate Change: [NAME], Etienne Piguet.- 2: Migration and Environmental Change in Asia: Graeme Hugo and [NAME]: Environmental change and Migration between Europe and its Neighbours: [NAME] and [NAME] Douglas.- 4: Environmental change and human migration in sub-Saharan Africa: [NAME] Morrissey.- 5: Climate Change, Extreme Weather Events, and Migration: Review of the Literature for Five Arab Countries: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and Olesya Tkacheva.- 6: Migration and Environmental Change in North America (USA and Canada): [NAME] and [NAME] 7: Migration and Climate Change in Latin America and the Caribbean: Raoul Kaenzig and Etienne Piguet.- 8: Migration and Climate Change in Oceania; [NAME] and [NAME] Campbell.- 9: The changing Hindu Kush Himalayas: Environmental change and migration: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Kollmair.-10:  Regional Policy Perspectives: [NAME]. | Policymakers around the world are increasingly concerned about the likely impact of climate change and environmental degradation on the movement of people. This book takes a hard look at the existing evidence available to policymakers in different regions of the world. How much do we really know about the impact of environmental change on migration? How will different regions of the world be affected in the future?  Is there evidence to show that migration can help countries adapt to environmental change ? What types of research have been conducted, how reliable is the evidence? These are some of the questions considered in this book, which presents, for the first time, a synthesis of relevant research findings for each major region of the world.  Written by regional experts, the book provides a comprehensive overview of the key findings of existing studies on the linkages between environmental change and the movement of people. More and more reports on migration and the environment are being published, but the information is often scattered between countries and within regions, and it is not always clear how much of this information is based on solid research. This book brings this evidence together for the first time, highlighting innovative studies and research gaps.  In doing this, the book seeks to help decision-makers draw lessons from existing studies and to identify priorities for further research. | <p>Compares how each of the major regions of the world is likely to be affected by changes in the environment and migration</p><p>Provides regional policy perspectives</p><p>Each chapter is written by leading experts of the region, on the basis of a unified framework</p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6915-1 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | [NAME] | Transformations and Social Justice |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 240 | Hard cover | Book | XX, 240 p. 11 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX12000 | Anthropology | JHM | [NAME] | Regional and Cultural Studies | GTB | Social Sciences / Anthropology | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. Proem: Engaging Contemporary Ethnography Across the Disciplines; [NAME], [NAME] and Clive Pope.- Part I. Social Justice and Transformation: Theoretical Ethnographic Visions.- Chapter 2. Social Justice, Transformation and Indigenous Methodologies.- [NAME] Smith.- Chapter 3. Voices of Women in Post-Apartheid South Africa: Visual Narrative, Social Justice and Empowerment; Annette Blum.- Chapter 4. Advanced Marginalization and Re-Criminalization of Undocumented Immigrants in the Post-Neoliberal State; [NAME] 5.- Rethinking English in Maori Medium Education; [NAME] Chapter 6. Negotiating Safe and Unsafe Space: Participation, [NAME] and Response-Ability in Higher Education Institute Transformation in South Africa; Helen MacDonald.- Part II. Practice and [NAME]: Doing Ethnography on the Ground.- Chapter 7. Living and Learning Together: Principled Practice for Engagement and Social Transformation in the East Kimberley Region of Western Australia; [NAME] Drew.- Chapter 8. The Journey to a Good Life: Exploring Personal and Organizational Transformation through Digital Storytelling; [NAME] and Janelle Fisher.- Chapter 9. Toi tu te Whenua, Toi tu te Tangata: A Holistic Maori Approach to Flood Management; Elizabeth-Mary Proctor.- Chapter 10. One woman, one too many; [NAME] 11. Co-creating visual theories of change with Treaty and decolonization activists; [NAME]. Emerging Methods: Traditional, Experimental, Transgressive Forms.- Chapter 12. Sustaining Fish-Human Communities? A More-than-Human Question; [NAME] Probyn.- Chapter 13. An 'insider's view' in Media Studies: Case Analysis of Performance Ethnography in Mobile Media Studies; [NAME]-haw Kim.- Chapter 14. [NAME]: A Poetic Representation of Loss and [NAME]; [NAME], Nicola Gavey and Julia Tolmie.- Part IV. [NAME] 15. A Critical Performance Ethnography that Matters; [NAME]. | This book discusses ethnography from the three points of view of Emerging Methodologies, Practice and [NAME], and Social Justice and Transformation, with an over arching emphasis on researchers' and participants' worldviews. While these three thematic threads cut across each other, the actual chapters will be located so that the reader understand many of the current issues and concerns—with specific exemplars from around the globe—for ethnographers. '[NAME]: Transformations and Social Justice' will have its 'finger on the pulse' of contemporary ethnography. Chapters demonstrate up-to-the-moment awareness of ethnographic methods, concerns, and subject matters within contemporary ethnographic writing. Authors are deeply engaged in both their subject matter and their method. For example, discussion of ethical issues surrounding visual methods of 'collecting' for photo-ethnographies is anticipated as a potential hot topic for this book. Unlike other ethnographic books which often suggest 'giving voice to others', this book will actually give voice to a wide variety of perspectives, from the points of view of researchers. | <p>Provides cutting-edge research from a variety of content areas/exemplars </p><p>Provides up-to-date examination of ethnographic practices and methodologies </p><p>Demonstrates how ethnography can matter in the early 21st Century, in a world seemingly dominated by disinterest in social justice and transformative practices </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-81-322-1046-7 | Social Sciences | Sahoo | Sadananda Sahoo; [NAME] | [NAME] and Development | Socioeconomic, Cultural, and Policy Perspectives |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 520 p. 27 illus., 21 illus. in color. | 0 | approx. | 129.95 | 139.05 | 142.94 | 117 | 173 | English | Social Sciences | [NAME] | Migration | [NAME] | SCW12014 | Development Economics | KCM | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer India | Planned | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: [NAME] centred development: Current practice, critical commentaries and research priorities.- Chapter 2: The Link with a Home Country: A Comparative Analysis of Host-country Environments for  [NAME] Engagement.- Chapter 3: [NAME] and Divergent Development in Kerala and Punjab: Querying the Migration-Development Discourse.- Chapter 4: Africa’s Money in Africa: Human and Physical Capital Dimensions.- Chapter 5: [NAME] and the Caribbean Economic Development.- Chapter 6: The African Brain Drain – Causes, Costs, Consequences.- Chapter 7: [NAME], Brain circulation and Indian development: Perspective from Australia and New Zealand.- Chapter 8: [NAME] and Knowledge Transfer: Sectoral Perspectives and Challenges.- Chapter 9: Rethinking Development through Dynamics of Skilled Human Migration from India.- Chapter 10: Knowledge Diasporas: Narratives of Transnational Migration and Higher Education.- Chapter 11: Reverse Brain Drain: New Strategies by Developed and Developing Countries.- Chapter 12: The diaspora as carrier of soft knowledge for development to the home country: evidence from highly skilled Filipino migrants in New Zealand and Australia.- Chapter 13: Tapping Talents in India through Diasporas Network: Opportunities and Challenges.- Chapter 14: [NAME] and European Identity: The Politics of Inclusion and Exclusion.- Chapter 15: Diaspora, Cultural Disintegration and Underdevelopment: The Case of Zimbabwe in the Last Ten Years (2001 – 2011).- Chapter 16: Integration and ‘Limited Acculturation’ of Tibetans at Shimla: Experience and Perceptions of a Diaspora.- Chapter 17: The Dark Side of ‘Diaspora’ in Africa’s Great Lakes Region.- Chapter 18: Laws Protecting the Rights and Interests of Returned Overseas Chinese and Their Relatives:  Their Relevance and Adaptation.- Chapter 19: Migrant Rights and the Citizenship Debate: The Case of Indian Workers in the GCC Countries.- Chapter 20: [NAME] in [NAME]: A Recipe for Contested Development.- Chapter 21: Does Role Mobility within Transnational Marriage Empower Immigrant Women?.- Chapter 22:  Rationale for Establishing a Return and Retirement Fund for Indian Overseas Women Migrant Workers in the ECR Countries.- Chapter 23: “Irangeles – Identities in Motion: Representation of Migration in Films of the Iranian Diaspora.- Chapter 24: The Empire writes from within: The Kali Theatre Company, a case study.- Chapter 25: The creation of [NAME] and its historical significance: A Study of [NAME] of Poppies. | ​This volume discusses how diasporas have evolved and engaged in economic, social and cultural domains of their host and home countries across the globe. The volume is divided into six parts: Issues, Challenges and Development Experiences; Diaspora Finance and Economic Development; [NAME] and [NAME]; The Politics of Inclusion and Exclusion; [NAME] and [NAME]; and Representation in Film, Theatre and Literature. It is truly a global representation of diasporic engagement. Its contributions come from experts in various disciplines across the globe, and the chapters cover socioeconomic, policy-related and cultural elements in countries as far apart as New Zealand and Zimbabwe. The contributors discuss major issues related to local communities' engagement with the diaspora and [NAME]--home relations in Africa, West Asia, South and South-east Asia, Australia and New Zealand, China, and the USA, providing a panoramic view of diasporic flows in the twenty-first century. The interdisciplinary thrust of the volume, together with its global focus, makes this volume useful to researchers, academics and experts from the social sciences, population sciences and development studies, as also to analysts and policymakers across the world. | <p>Provides a comprehensive and comparative advantage in the understanding of diasporas</p><p>Enriched with perspectives based on country-specific experiences</p><p>No other book till date focuses on cultural and social aspects of diasporas linked to development</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-8177-5 | Social Sciences | Scott-Ireton | Della A. Scott-Ireton | Between the Devil and the Deep | [NAME] in the Public Interpretation of Maritime Cultural Heritage | When the Land Meets the Sea | 5 | 1 | 2014 | 212 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 212 p. 26 illus., 21 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX13000 | Archaeology | HD | SCV35000 | Cultural Heritage | JFC | Social Sciences / Archaeology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2013-08-31 00:00:00 |  |  |  | In creating interpretive strategies for maritime sites, archaeologists and resource managers often are required to think creatively to overcome challenges and problems. These issues include interpreting sites in inaccessible locations and extremely deep water, enabling and controlling access to fragile sites and restricted areas, monitoring visitor behavior, making information interesting to a wide audience, and creating opportunities for public engagement, among other concerns. Meeting Challenges presents cutting-edge interpretation and public education strategies for maritime resources, both on land and underwater, with emphasis on solving the unique problems often associated with presenting these fragile, limited-access sites as heritage attractions and on developing effective visitation and civic engagement opportunities. The examples presented ideally can serve as models for resource managers, archaeologists engaged in interpretation, and site administrators. This volume brings together a diverse group of heritage professionals to discuss issues they’ve encountered and to present ideas and case studies for adapting, improvising, and overcoming them. | <p>Imparts cutting-edge interpretation and public engagement strategies for maritime resources ​</p><p>Includes specific strategies for overcoming problems to enable public access in difficult sites </p><p>Case studies presented serve as models for resource managers, archaeologists, and administrators    </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6795-9 | Social Sciences | Silva | [NAME]; [NAME] | Shaping Rural Areas in Europe | Perceptions and Outcomes on the Present and the Future | GeoJournal Library | 107 | 1 | 2013 | 268 | Hard cover | Book | IX, 268 p. 18 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX26000 | Human Geography | RGC | [NAME] | Regional and Cultural Studies | GTB | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. What is Shaping Rural Areas in Europe? Introduction; [NAME] and Elisabete Figueiredo.- Part I. Living in the Rural: New and Old Actors and their Visions on Rurality.- Chapter 2. [NAME] in the Country?: Mobilising Rural In-Migration; [NAME] Halfacree.- Chapter 3. [NAME] into Residential Practices and Rural Futures; [NAME] 4. Perceptions and Appropriations of Discourses in the National Park Island of Ons (Galicia, Spain); [NAME] and [NAME] Chapter 5. Having, Loving, Being in the Periphery: Interpretations of Locality in the National Landscape of Koli, Eastern Finland;  Eeva Uusitalo and [NAME] Assmuth.- Chapter 6. Projecting the ''Disadvantaged'': Project Class, [NAME] and the Creation of Ruralities; Alexandra Szőke.- Part II. Consuming and Representing the Rural.- Chapter 7. The Pastoral Ideal in Portugal: From Literature to Touristic Practices; Luís Silva.- Chapter 8. Mediating Rurality, History and Exclusivity in Pousadas de Portugal; [NAME] 9. McRural, No Rural or What Rural?: Some Reflections on Rural Reconfiguration Processes Based on the Promotion of Schist Villages Network, Portugal; Elisabete Figueiredo.- Chapter 10. Connecting Food Memories with the Rural: The Case of Portuguese and British Consumers; Mónica Truninger.- Chapter 11. Does the Countryside Still Feed the Country?: Producing and Re-Producing the Rural in Transylvania; [NAME] Chapter 12. In Search of the Rurban Idyll?: Developing the Residential Rural Areas in Finland; [NAME] Hämeenaho.- Chapter 13. The Foraged Countryside: Perceptions of Nature and Culture in Four Encounters with [NAME]; [NAME] 14. The Rurality Reinvention Discourse: Urban Demands, Expectations and Representations in the Construction of an Urban Rurality Project; Ana M. Fernandes.- Chapter 15. Cross-Cultural Perceptions and Discourses between Rural and Urban in Galicia; [NAME] and Santiago Prado.- Chapter 16. [NAME] on Perceived and Lived Ruralities and the Future of Rural Europe; Luís Silva.- Index. | Shaping Rural Areas in Europe. Perceptions and Outcomes on the Present and the Future sets out to investigate the effect of urban perceptions about the rural and consequent demands on rurality on the present and future configurations of rural territories in Europe in the early twenty-first century. This volume presents and discusses a broad range of case studies and theoretical and methodological approaches from different academic fields, mainly Anthropology, Sociology and Geography. | <p>Analyses rurality and rural imagery from different perspectives</p><p>Presents empirical material collected by using different methodologies</p><p>Deals with different territorial European contexts</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4419-0426-3 | Social Sciences | Smith | [NAME] | Encyclopedia of Global Archaeology |  |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 7500 | Hard cover | Book | 7500 p. In 10 volumes, not available separately. | 1 | final | 4200 | 4494 | 4620 | 3780 | 5591.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX13000 | Archaeology | HD | SCV35000 | Cultural Heritage | JFC | Social Sciences / Archaeology | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer New York | In production | 2013-09-20 00:00:00 |  |  | Main Sections: Agriculture and Domestication.- Archaeology of Art.- Archaeology in the Modern World.- Archaeological Science.- Bioarchaeology and Human Osteology.- Classical Archaeology.-  Conservation and Preservation.- Cultural Heritage Management.- Environmental Archaeology.- Ethics.- Extreme Environments.- Field Archaeology.- Geographical and Cultural Overview Essays.- Historical Archaeology.- History of Archaeology.- Human Evolution.- [NAME] and Mid-Range Societies.- Indiginous Archaeology.- Islamic Archaeology.- Legislation.- [NAME] East .- Political and Social Archaeology.- Public Education.- Theory.- [NAME] and Maritme Archaeology.- World Heritage. | Archaeology – the study of human cultures through the analysis and interpretation of artefacts and material remains – continues to captivate and engage people on a local and global level. Internationally celebrated heritage sites such as the pyramids—both Egyptian and Mayan—[NAME] caves, and the statues of Easter Island provide insights into our ancestors and their actions and motivation. But there is much more to archaeology than famous sites. Ask any archaeologist about their job and they will touch on archaeological theory, chemistry, geology, history, classical studies, museum studies, ethical practice, and survey methods, along with the analysis and interpretation of artefacts and sites. Archaeology is a much broader subject than its public image and branches into many other fields in the social and physical sciences. This multi-volume work provides a comprehensive and systematic coverage of archaeology that is unprecedented, not only in terms of the use of multi-media, but also in terms of content. It encompasses the breadth of the subject along with key aspects that are tapped from other disciplines. It includes all time periods and regions of the world and all stages of human development.  Mostly importantly, this encyclopedia includes the knowledge of leading scholars from around the world.  The entries in this encyclopedia range from succinct summaries of specific sites and the scientific aspects of archaeological enquiry to detailed discussions of archaeological concepts, theories and methods, and from investigations into the social, ethical and political dimensions of archaeological practice to biographies of leading archaeologists from throughout the world. The different forms of archaeology are explored, along with the techniques used for each and the challenges, concerns and issues that face archaeologists today. The Encyclopedia of Global Archaeology has two outstanding innovations.  The first is that scholars were able to submit entries in their own language. Over 300,000 words have been translated from French, Spanish, Portuguese, German, Italian, Japanese, Turkish and Russian. Many of these entries are by scholars who are publishing in English for the first time.This compendium is both a print reference and an online reference work. The encyclopedia’s second major innovation is that it harnesses the capabilities of an online environment, enhancing both the presentation and dissemination of information. Most particularly, the continuous updating allowed by an online environment should ensure that the Encyclopedia of Global Archaeology is a definitive reference work for archaeology and archaeologists. | <P>-First truly comprehensive Encyclopedia of Archaeology of this size (9-10 volumes)</P> <P>-International and interdisciplinary focus, including sections and contributors from whole scope of Archaeological study</P> <P>-Useful, integrated online enhancements including color images, video, and full search functions.</P> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4419-0465-2 | Social Sciences | Smith | [NAME] | Encyclopedia of Global Archaeology |  |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 7500 |  | eReference work | 7500 p. eReference. | 1 | final | 4200 | 4998 | 5040 | 3780 | 5875 | English | Social Sciences | SCX13000 | Archaeology | HD | SCV35000 | Cultural Heritage | JFC | Social Sciences / Archaeology | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer New York | In production | 2013-09-20 00:00:00 |  |  | Main Sections: Agriculture and Domestication.- Archaeology of Art.- Archaeology in the Modern World.- Archaeological Science.- Bioarchaeology and Human Osteology.- Classical Archaeology.-  Conservation and Preservation.- Cultural Heritage Management.- Environmental Archaeology.- Ethics.- Extreme Environments.- Field Archaeology.- Geographical and Cultural Overview Essays.- Historical Archaeology.- History of Archaeology.- Human Evolution.- [NAME] and Mid-Range Societies.- Indiginous Archaeology.- Islamic Archaeology.- Legislation.- [NAME] East .- Political and Social Archaeology.- Public Education.- Theory.- [NAME] and Maritme Archaeology.- World Heritage. | Archaeology – the study of human cultures through the analysis and interpretation of artefacts and material remains – continues to captivate and engage people on a local and global level. Internationally celebrated heritage sites such as the pyramids—both Egyptian and Mayan—[NAME] caves, and the statues of Easter Island provide insights into our ancestors and their actions and motivation. But there is much more to archaeology than famous sites. Ask any archaeologist about their job and they will touch on archaeological theory, chemistry, geology, history, classical studies, museum studies, ethical practice, and survey methods, along with the analysis and interpretation of artefacts and sites. Archaeology is a much broader subject than its public image and branches into many other fields in the social and physical sciences. This multi-volume work provides a comprehensive and systematic coverage of archaeology that is unprecedented, not only in terms of the use of multi-media, but also in terms of content. It encompasses the breadth of the subject along with key aspects that are tapped from other disciplines. It includes all time periods and regions of the world and all stages of human development.  Mostly importantly, this encyclopedia includes the knowledge of leading scholars from around the world.  The entries in this encyclopedia range from succinct summaries of specific sites and the scientific aspects of archaeological enquiry to detailed discussions of archaeological concepts, theories and methods, and from investigations into the social, ethical and political dimensions of archaeological practice to biographies of leading archaeologists from throughout the world. The different forms of archaeology are explored, along with the techniques used for each and the challenges, concerns and issues that face archaeologists today. The Encyclopedia of Global Archaeology has two outstanding innovations.  The first is that scholars were able to submit entries in their own language. Over 300,000 words have been translated from French, Spanish, Portuguese, German, Italian, Japanese, Turkish and Russian. Many of these entries are by scholars who are publishing in English for the first time.This compendium is both a print reference and an online reference work. The encyclopedia’s second major innovation is that it harnesses the capabilities of an online environment, enhancing both the presentation and dissemination of information. Most particularly, the continuous updating allowed by an online environment should ensure that the Encyclopedia of Global Archaeology is a definitive reference work for archaeology and archaeologists. | <P>-First truly comprehensive Encyclopedia of Archaeology of this size (9-10 volumes)</P> <P>-International and interdisciplinary focus, including sections and contributors from whole scope of Archaeological study</P> <P>-Useful, integrated online enhancements including color images, video, and full search functions.</P> | Science | E-book | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4419-0466-9 | Social Sciences | Smith | [NAME] | Encyclopedia of Global Archaeology |  |  |  | 1 | 2013 | 7500 | Hard cover | Book + Online Access | 7500 p. Print + eReference. | 1 | final | 5250 | 5617.5 | 5775 | 4725 | 6989 | English | Social Sciences | SCX13000 | Archaeology | HD | SCV35000 | Cultural Heritage | JFC | Social Sciences / Archaeology | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer New York | In production | 2013-09-20 00:00:00 |  |  | Main Sections: Agriculture and Domestication.- Archaeology of Art.- Archaeology in the Modern World.- Archaeological Science.- Bioarchaeology and Human Osteology.- Classical Archaeology.-  Conservation and Preservation.- Cultural Heritage Management.- Environmental Archaeology.- Ethics.- Extreme Environments.- Field Archaeology.- Geographical and Cultural Overview Essays.- Historical Archaeology.- History of Archaeology.- Human Evolution.- [NAME] and Mid-Range Societies.- Indiginous Archaeology.- Islamic Archaeology.- Legislation.- [NAME] East .- Political and Social Archaeology.- Public Education.- Theory.- [NAME] and Maritme Archaeology.- World Heritage. | Archaeology – the study of human cultures through the analysis and interpretation of artefacts and material remains – continues to captivate and engage people on a local and global level. Internationally celebrated heritage sites such as the pyramids—both Egyptian and Mayan—[NAME] caves, and the statues of Easter Island provide insights into our ancestors and their actions and motivation. But there is much more to archaeology than famous sites. Ask any archaeologist about their job and they will touch on archaeological theory, chemistry, geology, history, classical studies, museum studies, ethical practice, and survey methods, along with the analysis and interpretation of artefacts and sites. Archaeology is a much broader subject than its public image and branches into many other fields in the social and physical sciences. This multi-volume work provides a comprehensive and systematic coverage of archaeology that is unprecedented, not only in terms of the use of multi-media, but also in terms of content. It encompasses the breadth of the subject along with key aspects that are tapped from other disciplines. It includes all time periods and regions of the world and all stages of human development.  Mostly importantly, this encyclopedia includes the knowledge of leading scholars from around the world.  The entries in this encyclopedia range from succinct summaries of specific sites and the scientific aspects of archaeological enquiry to detailed discussions of archaeological concepts, theories and methods, and from investigations into the social, ethical and political dimensions of archaeological practice to biographies of leading archaeologists from throughout the world. The different forms of archaeology are explored, along with the techniques used for each and the challenges, concerns and issues that face archaeologists today. The Encyclopedia of Global Archaeology has two outstanding innovations.  The first is that scholars were able to submit entries in their own language. Over 300,000 words have been translated from French, Spanish, Portuguese, German, Italian, Japanese, Turkish and Russian. Many of these entries are by scholars who are publishing in English for the first time.This compendium is both a print reference and an online reference work. The encyclopedia’s second major innovation is that it harnesses the capabilities of an online environment, enhancing both the presentation and dissemination of information. Most particularly, the continuous updating allowed by an online environment should ensure that the Encyclopedia of Global Archaeology is a definitive reference work for archaeology and archaeologists. | <P>-First truly comprehensive Encyclopedia of Archaeology of this size (9-10 volumes)</P> <P>-International and interdisciplinary focus, including sections and contributors from whole scope of Archaeological study</P> <P>-Useful, integrated online enhancements including color images, video, and full search functions.</P> | Science | Reduced (3) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-7210-6 | Social Sciences | Tsolidis | Georgina Tsolidis | Migration, [NAME] and Identity | Cross-National Experiences | International Perspectives on Migration | 6 | 1 | 2014 | 194 | Hard cover | Book | VI, 194 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | [NAME] | Migration | [NAME] | SCX22000 | Sociology, general | JHB | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-09-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: Introduction:  Does Diaspora Matter When Living Cultural Difference?: Georgina Tsolidis.- Chapter 2: Living on the Move  Belonging and Identification Among Adolescent Children of Immigrants in Italy: Enzo Colombo.- Chapter 3:  Muslim Women in Western Preschooling Diasporic Effects on Identity Issues: [NAME] 4:  ‘When I land in Islamabad I feel home and when I land in Heathrow I feel home’  [NAME] and Diasporic Identities of South Asian British Citizens in London, in Leicester and in North England: Ulrike M. Vieten.- Chapter 5:  Refugee Women, Education, and Self Authorship: Melinda McPherson.- Chapter 6:  Invoking an Ivory Tower Journalistic Misrepresentation of Me as a Critic of Race and the Content of my Criticisms: Stella Coram.- Chapter 7:   ‘Trouble in the Mall Again’ Naming as Social Drama in Multicultural Melbourne: Vikki Pollard and Georgina Tsolidis.- Chapter 8:  Beyond Fear and Towards Hope Transnationalism and the Recognition of Rights Across Borders: [NAME] 9:  Pedagogies of the Japanese Diaspora Racialization and Sexualization in Australia: [NAME] and [NAME] 10:  Body as Gendered and Sexualised and Recent Migration of Poles to the United Kingdom: Bernadetta Siara.- Chapter 11:  Men's Experiences and Masculinity Transformations Migration and Family Reunification in the [NAME] in Italy: Francesco Della Puppa.- Chapter 12:  Shifting Gender Roles and Shifting Power Relations Immigrant/Migrant [NAME] in New York and Los Angeles: Shobha Hamal Gurung.- Chapter 13:  Comparing the Family Lives of Vietnamese Wives in Taiwan and the USA: Chyong-fang [NAME]. | Framed in relation to diaspora this collection engages with the subject of how cultural difference is lived and how complex and shifting identities shape and respond to spatial politics of belonging. [NAME] is understood in a variety of ways, which makes this an eclectic collection of papers. Authors use various theoretical frameworks to explore diverse groups of people with a variety of experiences in a wide range of settings. They are making sense of the experiences of women and men from a range of ethnic backgrounds, negotiating identities through family, work and education. The micro dynamics of the everyday offer an evocative 'bottom up' means of understanding the tensions implicit in living multiple belongings. The common thread for the collection comes from the glimpses these authors provide into the remaking of our globalized world. The aim is to shed light on racism, dislocation and alienation on the one hand, and on the other hand, to consider how the complex power relations within the everyday mediate a sense of resistance and hope. The papers are arranged around four themes; 1.      [NAME], 2.      Representing a Way of Being, 3.      Sexualised Identifications and 4.      Marriage and Family. | <p>Focuses on diasporic identification through family, work and education </p><p>Drawn from a range of ethnic backgrounds </p><p>Provides rich and evocative insights into the consequences of the world becoming a smaller place</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6744-7 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME]; [NAME] | Territoriality and Migration in the E.U. Neighbourhood | Spilling over the Wall | International Perspectives on Migration | 5 | 1 | 2014 | 244 | Hard cover | Book | X, 244 p. 4 illus., 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | [NAME] | Migration | [NAME] | SCW12073 | European Integration | KCS | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part 1: Introduction: Chapter 1: [NAME] and [NAME]: The new realities of European migration management: what does it mean for insiders and outsiders?.- Chapter 2: Saskia Sassen: Anti-Immigrant Politics along with Institutional Incorporation?.- Part 2: Working your way in: Workers and entry into EU economic space: Chapter 3: [NAME]: Why is the European Union’s Freedom of Labour Movement not Freely Given?.- Chapter 4: [NAME]: European Education Regionalization and its impact on the global migration of nurses.- Chapter 5: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], and [NAME]: From “Hedema” to “Zemegria”: Morocco’s Role as “Migration Hub” for the EU.- Part 3: The Asylum seekers, migrants, and the moving border: Chapter 6: [NAME] and [NAME]: The spatial logics of migration governance along the southern frontier of the European Union.- Chapter 7: [NAME]: The Impact of European Union migration policies on irregular migration in Sub-Saharan Africa.- Chapter 8: [NAME]: The New Europe: Freedom against Aliens and Minorities.- Part 4: Reworking citizenship and integration: Chapter 9: Shahamak [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], and Johannes Henriksen: Migration and integration regimes and substantial citizenships in the EU.- Chapter 10: [NAME]: Exhibiting Migration stories in Germany: Histories, heritage, contact zones and immigration country.- Part 5: Circularity and migration management: Chapter 11: [NAME]: Out of the labour market: Intra-EU return and retirement migration.- Chapter 12: Dr. [NAME]: The European Neighborhood Policy and its capacity to manage mobility and migration.- Chapter 13: [NAME]: Questioning immigration in the Czech Republic before the 2009 economic crisis.- Chapter 14: [NAME]: The production of a safe neighborhood and the disciplining of international mobility. | This volume brings together an interdisciplinary group of scholars around an important question: how has migration changed in Europe as the European Union has enlarged, and what are the consequences for countries (and for migrants themselves) inside and outside of these redrawn jurisdictional and territorial borders? By addressing this question the book contributes to three current debates with respect to EU migration management: 1) that recent developments in EU migration management represent a profound spatial and organizational reconfiguration of the regional governance of migration, 2) the trend towards the externalization or subcontracting of migration control and, 3) how the implications of Europe’s changing immigration policy are increasingly felt across the European neighborhood and beyond.  Based on new empirical research, the authors in this collection explore these three processes and their consequences for both member and non-member EU states, for migrants themselves, and for migration systems in the region. The collection indicates that despite the rhetoric of social and spatial integration across the EU region, as one wall has come down, new walls have gone up as novel migration and security policy frameworks have been erected – making European immigration more complex, and potentially more influential beyond the EU zone, than ever. | <p>Examines the impact of EU territoriality and migration management </p><p>Tackles contemporary theoretical arguments in the wider literature using case studies and empirical examples drawn from a broad geographical range</p><p>Includes authors drawn from various disciplinary backgrounds</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6731-7 | Social Sciences | Weeks | [NAME]; [NAME]; [NAME] | Spatial Inequalities | Health, Poverty, and Place in Accra, Ghana | GeoJournal Library | 110 | 1 | 2014 | 219 | Hard cover | Book | X, 219 p. 39 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX26000 | Human Geography | RGC | SCH27002 | Public Health | MBN | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Contributors.- Acknowledgments.- Part I: Introduction: 1: Introduction to the Accra School: An Overview of Health, Poverty, and Place in Accra: [NAME], [NAME], and Justin Stoler.- Part II: Accra’s Urban Morphology and Neighborhood Structure.- 2: Defining Neighborhood Boundaries for Urban Health Research: A Case Study of Accra, Ghana: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], and [NAME]: Comparing boundaries for measuring contextual effects on health in Accra, Ghana: Marta Jankowska.- 4: Delineation and Classification of Urban Neighborhoods of Accra, Ghana, from [NAME]: Manual vs. Semi-Automated Approaches: [NAME],  [NAME], [NAME], and Milo Vejraska.- 5: Methods for Texture-based Classification of Urban Fringe Areas from Medium and High Resolution Satellite Imagery: [NAME]-Jensen.- Part III: Health and Well-being in Accra’s Neighborhoods: 6: Exploring Social Resilience among Young Migrants in Old [NAME], an [NAME]: [NAME] Tutu.- 7: Researching Urban Slum Health in Nima, a Slum in Accra: [NAME], [NAME] Oppong.- 8: What if Neighbors' [NAME]? The Influence of Neighborhood Definitions of Health Outcomes in Accra: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] 9: Living Arrangements and Fertility: A Case Study in Southern Ghana: Magdalena Benza.- 10: Fertility in Context: Exploring Egocentric Neighborhoods in Accra: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Neighborhood Structure: Implications for the Future Provision of Health Services: 11: The Sachet Water Phenomenon in Accra: Socioeconomic, Environmental, and Public Health Implications for Water Security.- Justin Stoler.- 12: Healthcare Access In Three Residential Neighborhoods In Accra, Ghana: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], and Philip Baiden.- 13: Food Security in Accra: [NAME] Index. | This book provides a fresh analysis of the demography, health and well-being of a major African city.  It brings a range of disciplinary approaches to bear on the pressing topics of urban poverty, urban health inequalities and urban growth.  The approach is primarily spatial and includes the integration of environmental information from satellites and other geospatial sources with social science and health survey data. The authors Ghanaians and outsiders, have worked to understand the urban dynamics in this burgeoning West African metropolis, with an emphasis on urban disparities in health and living standards. Few cities in the global South have been examined from so many different perspectives. Our analysis employs a wide range of GIScience methods, including analysis of remotely sensed imagery and spatial statistical analysis, applied to a wide range of data, including census, survey and health clinic data, all of which are supplemented by field work, including systematic social observation, focus groups, and key informant interviews. This book aims to explain and highlight the mix of methods, and the important findings that have been emerging from this research, with the goal of providing guidance and inspiration for others doing similar work in cities of other developing nations. | <p>Provides an unique analyses of spatial inequalities in health and well-being in urban West Africa</p><p>Illustrates novel analytical approaches to health and well-being</p><p>Includes cutting edge applications of remote sensing analyses to urban public health</p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-7531-6 | Social Sciences | Western | [NAME] | Gender-based Violence and Depression in Women | A Feminist Group Work Response | SpringerBriefs in Social Work |  | 1 | 2013 | 102 | Soft cover | Book | VIII, 102 p. 3 illus. | 0 | final | 49.99 | 53.49 | 54.99 | 44.99 | 67 | English | Social Sciences | SCX21000 | Social Work | JKSN | [NAME] | Psychotherapy and Counseling | MMJT | Social Sciences / Social Work | Brief | Springer New York | In production | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- An introductory visit to a women’s journaling group.- A conceptual and contextual background for theorising and understanding gender-based violence and depression in women.- [NAME]-based violence against women and human rights.- Depression in women.- Feminist group work, consciousness-raising and resistance.- Women and journaling.- The Women’s Journaling Group Program (WJGP) model.- An example outline of a Women’s Journaling Group Program.- Practice guidelines for facilitating a Women’s Journaling Group Program.- Postscript.- Index. | ​​​​Social workers, in whatever capacity they work, can expect to come into contact with women who have experienced/are experiencing violence and with women who are experiencing depression.  Therefore, a range of social work supports and interventions are required in order to meet the needs of diverse women and assist them in their recovery.  One of these methods is group work where women can share their experiences, learn from each other, reflect on their learnings and identify and achieve changes in their circumstances.  This book is based on original research by the author that sought to understand depression in women from a feminist and gender-informed perspective, develop a feminist-based group work response, and highlight the activities of consciousness-raising and resistance as methods for women to achieve change in their lives and in their selves.  An innovative and creative group work program, the Women’s Journaling Group Program, was developed from this research and provides a new method of working with women who have experienced/are experiencing violence and mild-moderate depression. The Women’s Journaling Group Program is research-informed, theoretically-grounded, practice-based and feminist and gender-focused. This book, and the program model within it, is an important contribution to the field of critical feminist social work practice.​ | <p>​Focuses on depression in women as a result of violence </p><p>Written from a feminist and gender-informed perspective </p><p>Introduces an innovative and creative group work program</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-94-007-6820-8 | Social Sciences | Wippel | [NAME] | Regionalizing Oman | Political, Economic and Social Dynamics | United Nations University Series on Regionalism | 6 | 1 | 2013 | 321 | Hard cover | Book | X, 321 p. 37 illus., 27 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX18000 | Political Science, general | JPA | SCJ15000 | Landscape/Regional and Urban Planning | RP | Social Sciences / Political Science | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-06-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface; [NAME]. ''Regionalizing Oman'': A New Interest of Research on Oman and its Spatial Dimensions; Steffen Wippel.- Part I: Concepts of Regionalisation and Region-Building.- Chapter 2. Conceptual Considerations of “Space” and “Region”: Political, Economic and Social Dynamics of Region-Building.- Steffen Wippel.- Chapter 3. Theorizing Regionalism(s): When “Regions” Emerge and Interact; [NAME]  and Frank Mattheis.- Chapter 4. Working with “Translocality”: Conceptual Implications and Analytical Consequences; [NAME] Bromber.- Part II. The Translocal, Transnational and Transregional Movement of People.- Chapter 5. “We are part of Zanzibar” – Translocal Practices and Imaginative Geographies in Contemporary Oman-Zanzibar Relations; [NAME] and [NAME]-Mahn.- Chapter 6. Of Red Cells, Translocality and Origins: Inherited Blood Disorders in Oman; [NAME] Beaudevin.- Chapter 7. Oman-India Relations: Exploring the Long-Term Migration Dynamics; [NAME] Pradhan.- Chapter 8. Negotiating Authenticity and Translocality in Oman: the “Desertscapes” of the Harasiis Tribe; [NAME] Chatty.- Part III. Micro and Macro Regionalisation through Economic Practices;.- Chapter 9. Re-reading the Role of Oman within its International Trade Relations. From 16th through to the 19th Centuries; Beatrice Nicolini.- Chapter 10. Oman and the Indian Ocean Rim – Economic Integration Across Conventional Meta-Regions; Steffen Wippel.- Chapter 11. Oman Caught Between the GCC Common Market and Bilateral Free Trade with the US: Is It Worth Breaking the Rules?; [NAME] 12. Musandam and its Trade with Iran. Regional Linkages across the Strait of Hormuz; [NAME] 13. Is Littoralization Reconfiguring the Omani Territory?; Belgacem Mokhtar.- Chapter 14. The Impact of Shopping Malls on Traditional Retail Stores in Muscat. Case study of al-Seeb Wilayat; [NAME]. Part IV. State and Society in Regional and Global Perspectives.- Chapter 15. Private Documents as a Source for Regional History: The Archive of the ÝAbrÐyÐn of [NAME]; [NAME] 16. Domesticating Local Elites. [NAME], Walis and State-Building under Sultan Qaboos; [NAME] Valeri.- Chapter 17. [NAME]: Creating a New Region Across the Water; Gulshan Dietl.- Chapter 18. The Political Economy of Internationalization and Privatization of Higher Education in the Sultanate of Oman; Torsten Brandenburg.- Chapter 19. Bringing the Global and the Local Together through English in Oman; [NAME] and [NAME] Concluding Remarks: Regionalizing Oman beyond Conventional Metageographies; [NAME]. | This volume addresses the historical structures and current dynamics of Oman’s regionalization processes and their political, economic and social dimensions. It is based on an interdisciplinary and trans-regional dialogue between scholars from different social sciences and area studies such as political science, economics, management, economic and social geography, history, social anthropology and linguistics as well as Middle East/West Asian, gulf and African studies, and develops four major axes of research:- Oman’s integration into global and regional flows of goods, capital, people and ideas;- The multi-scaled political negotiation of such integration (or disintegration) processes;- Consequences of suchlike processes and forms of regionalization for (translocal) actors;- Ideas and strategic communication of regional belonging and the constitution of regions.Each chapter deals with one or more of these issues. Part I deals with concepts of regionalisation and region-building and presents different approaches that accentuate certain dimensions of these processes and come from different disciplinary backgrounds. Part II focuses on the translocal, transnational and (trans)regional movement of people, their practices and imaginations, be they contemporary labour in- and out-migrants, returnees from Eastern Africa or nomadic tribal members. Part III takes a closer look particularly at economic issues and regionalisation processes that are mainly based on multiple trade links, regional development policies or politics of regionalism. Part IV analyses political and socio-cultural issues in regional and global perspectives. | <p>Addresses the historical structures and current dynamics of Oman’s regionalization processes and their political, economic and social dimensions </p><p>Presents and interdisciplinary and transregional dialogue between scholars from different social sciences and area studies</p><p>Develops four major axes of research of Oman’s regionalization </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-6783-6 | Social Sciences | Yusuf | Farhat Yusuf; [NAME]. M. Martins; [NAME] | Methods of Demographic Analysis |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 311 | Hard cover | Book | XXX, 311 p. 54 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | SCX25000 | [NAME] | JHBD | SCS16003 | Statistics for Social Science, Behavorial Science, Education, Public Policy, and [NAME] | JHBC | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2013-07-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: Demographic Information.- Chapter 3: Some Basic Statistical Measures.- Chapter 4: Elements of Demographic Analysis.- Chapter 5: Fertility.- Chapter 6: Mortality.- Chapter 7: Life Tables.- Chapter 8: Migration.- Chapter 9: Some Demographic Events and Characteristics Analysis.- Chapter 10: Multiple Decrement Tables.- Chapter 11: Population Projections.- Chapter 12: Testing the Quality and Smoothing of Demographic Data.- Chapter 13: The Stable Population Model.- Chapter 14: [NAME]. | This book provides an up-to-date overview of demographic analysis and methods, including recent developments in demography. Concepts and methods, from the nature of demographic information through data collection and the basics of statistical measures and on to demographic analysis itself are succinctly explained. Measures and analyses of fertility, mortality, life tables, migration and demographic events such as marriage, education and labour force are described while later chapters cover multiple decrement tables, population projections, the importance of testing and smoothing demographic data, the stable population model and demographic software. An emphasis on practical aspects and the use of real-life examples based on data from around the globe make this book accessible, whilst comprehensive references and links to data and other resources on the internet help readers to explore further. The text is concise and well written, making it ideally suited to a wider audience from students to academics and teachers. Students of demography, geography, sociology, economics, as well as professionals, academics and students of marketing, human resource management, and public health who have an interest in population issues will all find this book useful. | <p>Explains concepts and methods of analysis in a succinct and easy to understand manner</p><p>Focuses on data and methods useful in  a variety of population situations</p><p>Emphasis on conceptual and practical rather than theoretical and mathematical aspects of Demography </p><p> </p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law